manualshive.com logo in svg

Kyocera TASKalfa 2551ci, Service Manual

The Kyocera TASKalfa 2551ci is a high-performance multifunctional printer that offers exceptional print quality and efficiency. Ensure safe operation with the comprehensive Safety Manual, available for download free of charge from our website. Access the manual today at manualshive.com and take advantage of its valuable instructions and guidelines.

Share
Download
background image

2NP

2-4-22

YC10

 YC13

YC8

DATABK_N
DATABK_P
SH_BK
BD_BK
GND
DATAM_N
DATAM_P
SH_M

FFC

BD_M
GND

YC3

YC43

DATAC_N

FFC

DATAC_P
SH_C
BD_C
GND
DATAY_N
DATAY_P
SH_Y
BD_Y

YC4

GND

YC9

 YC14

VCONTC
GND

FFC

VCONTY
THLSUY
VCONTM
POLRDY_Y
VCONTK
POLRDY_C
POLREM_C
POLREM_M
POLRDY_BK
24V1
POLREM_BK

YC3

LSU_MOT_OUTA
LSU_MOT_OUTB
24V1

YC6

GND
24V1
GND
POLCLK_BK
POLCLK_M
POLRDY_M
POLCLK_C
POLREM_Y

FFC

POLCLK_Y
LSU_COLOR_EN
LSU_BK_EN
THLSUBK
GND
3.3VIL2

YC2

YC5

FFC

YC1

YC11

3
2

11
10

4

9
8
7
6

EPWB

1

31

APCPWB

APCPWB

APCPWB

APCPWB

LASER SUCANNER
UNIT-Y

LASER SUCANNER
UNIT-C

LASER SUCANNER
UNIT-M

LASER SUCANNER
UNIT-K

4

ENG_OFF

16
15

39
38

13
12

20
19
18

TAN

36
35

HOLD_ENG

TAP
GND
TBN
TBP

HSYNCB_P
HSYNCC_N

EGSBSY

40
39

40

8

12

38

EGSO

6

GND

15
14

2

4

5

3

14

15

9

13

23
22

16

17

27
26

20

1

8

1

5

25
24

SLEEP_INT

37

28

34
33
32

37
36
35

29

40
39

40
39

5

21

7

JS_LED
EGSIRN

11

HSYNDD_P
SLEEP

10

9

30

GND

GND

37

35

GND

34

SAR_CH1_N

33
32

MPWB

1

3

EGSCLK

2

EGSI

SLEEP_INT

EGSDIR

4

14
13

HSYNCC_P
HSYNDD_N

20
19

VSYNDD_P
HSYNCA_N

18
17

HSYNCA_P
HSYNCB_N

22
21

VSYNCC_P
VSYNDD_N

24
23

VSYNCB_P
VSYNCC_N

TCLKP

30

28

25

VSYNCA_P
VSYNCB_N

27
26

GND
VSYNCA_N

GND

33

GND
TCN

34

31

TCP

29

TCLKN

32

19

22

24

26
25

27

30

G6_EG_SDIR
G6_EG_SI

7

G6_EG_SO

6
5

12

10

11

8

10

2

6

7

4
3

16

31

GND

31

SAR_VCLK_N

30

VSYNC_AP

VSYNC_CP

VSYNC_BP
VSYNC_CN

HSYNC_BP

HSYNC_DN
HSYNC_DP
SLEEP_ENG

G6_EG_SCLK

G6_EG IRN

G6_EG_SBSY

16

HSYNC_CN

23

VSYNC_BN

15

23

HSYNC_BN

17

HSYNC_AP

17

21

HSYNC_CP

14
13

11

12

ENG_OFF(NC)
JS_LED

HLD_ENG

9

29
28

18

19

20

24

26
25

22
21

SAR_CH3_N

33

18

GND

28

VSYNC_AN

27

HSYNC_AN

VSYNC_DP

VSYNC_DN

SAR_VCLK_P

29

SAR_CH3_P

32

38

35

SAR_CH2_P

34

37
36

SAR_CH2_N

36

SAR_CH1_P

38

1

B1
B2

GND

SGND

1

LSUCPWB

MP(C)_CLK

20

LSU_TH(K)

1

SGND

BD(K)

2

3

B2

VCONT_C

B1

5

2

3
4
5

4

6
7

LSU_TH

8

10

BD

9

VDP

1

SH

4

14

16

5

3

VDP(M)

14

VDN(M)

6
7

1
2

1

8

1

9

1

9

2

YC7

7

14

8

8

13

5

Lock

4

3

Start/Stop

3

3

1

1

10

9

7

3.3VIL

BD

1

1

4
5

7

8

2

6

9

6

BD(M)

12

12

11

11

SGND

10

11

10

10

7

SH

SH(Y)

4

12

5

2

6

SGND

SGND

TH_LSU

LSU_TH

16

5

5

2

18

3

2

19

17

4

4

3

B3

B15

B13

B13

B15

B15

B1

B14

B2

B3

B3

B13
B12

B5

POL_RDY_Y

B4

B4

B4

B5

B5

B11

B6

B6

B6

B8

B10

B7

B8

B7

B7

B9

B8

B8

3.3VIL

VCONT_BK

EN

5

EN(C)

POL_RDY_C

19

20

20

B12

B12

B14

B14

19

B9

B10

B9

B10

B11

B11

17

B3

B3

B7

B7

17
18

B8

B8

18

B4

B4

POL_REM_BK

B13

B13

B3

B13

B4

B12

24V1

B7

B12

B11

B9

B10

B6

B10
B11
B12

B9

LSU_CL_MOT_REMA

B14

B14

B2

LSU_CL_MOT_REMB

B15

B15

B1

B14

B2

GND

A2

A2

A14

24V1

A1

A1

B1

B2

A15

B1

A13

A13

A15
A14

A14

A6

A1

A13

A2

A8

A3

A15

A8

A11

A9

A4

A7
A6

A9

MP(K)_REM

GND

A5
A4

A13

A3

A4

A2

A12

6

A12

A4

A12

A7

A7

A6

A10

A10

A9

MP(K)_CLK

5

EN(K)

3.3VIL

6

8

SH(K)

BDPWB

GND

4

FFC

3.3VIL

1

TH_LSU

3

BD

2

MP(M)_CLK

24V1

LSU_EN_BK

SGND

POL_CLK_Y

VDP(M)

3

VDP

24V1

A3

POL_REM_Y

3

3

MP(M)_REM

2

2

A3

POL_RDY_M

A7

A8

POL_CLK_M

A6

A8

POL_CLK_BK

1

19

2

VDN(K)
VDP(K)

20

1

19

19

2

20

20

1

Relay

4

16
15

17

13

13

SH(K)
BD(K)

1

24V1

2

PGND

2

1

2

4

3

18
17

18

3

18

3

17

PM-Y

24V1

5

5

2

2

GND

4

4

Clock

MP(Y)_RDY

4

MP(Y)_REM

SGND

MP(Y)_CLK

SH(M)

5

7

6

6

15

15

5

5

16

9

10

10

11

9

12

9

10

8

VCONT

VCONT

VDN(C)

3

8

VDP

1

VDP(Y)

VDN

2

VDN(Y)

9

10

11

11

SH(C)

8

VDP(C)

9

9

9

12

12

8

13

13

13

8

EN

EN(Y)

6

6

7

14

3.3VIL

3.3VIL

BD(Y)

2

5

8

4
3

15

BC(C)

7

15

6

6

7

14

16

16

15

14

TH_LSU

3

FFC

BD

2
1

1

GND

GND

3

5

3

LSU_TH(Y)

BD

VDN(Y)
VDP(Y)

2

4

GND

Lock

SH(Y)
BD(Y)

GND

SGND

1

3.3VIL

3

5
4
3
2

BDPWB

GND

4

PM-C

24V1

5
4
3

Start/Stop

2

4

MP(C)_RDY

24V1

3

MP(C)_REM

2

PGND

1

1

4

LSU_TH_Y

VDP

VDP(C)

5

5

VCONT_Y

1

VCONT_M

3

2

VDN(C)

SGND

2

VCONT

VCONT

GND

GND

SGND

7

3.3VIL

GND

Clock

1

SH

SH(C)

10

8

VDN

TH_LSU

1

10

BD

BD

LSU_TH

2

1

3.3VIL

BDPWB

GND

4

FFC

TH_LSU

3

BD
3.3VIL

1

POL_RDY_BK

BD(C)

POL_REM_M

4

POL_REM_C

LSU_TH(C)

3

Start/Stop

3

3

3
4

Clock

B6

B5

B11

B5

B5

B6

4

4

Lock

A11

B9

B10

PM-M

24V1

5

5

GND

POL_CLK_C

MP(M)_RDY

A12

A6

A4

PGND

A5

GND

24V1

A11

A5

A10

4
5

2

2

1

1

5

4

A9

2

1

10

VDN(M)

A10

A9

LSU_EN_COL

VDN

A10

BD

2

TH_LSU

SH(M)

4

7

GND

SH

1

A12

VCONT

VCONT

3

LSU_TH_BK

BDPWB

GND

4

FFC

3.3VIL

1

TH_LSU

3

BD

2

2

A13

3.3V3

3.3VIL3

4

5

A15

A13

BD(M)

3

B15

3.3VIL3

SGND

EN(M)

6

EN

GND

7

5

A3

1

A11

A1

A4

A5

A11

A5

A11
A12

A10

A7

A8

A8

A9

A7

A6

A1

GND

A14

A15

A14

Relay

A2

A15

A14

A5

A2

A3

PM-K

24V1

5

5

Clock

4

4

A1

Start/Stop

3

Lock

2

2

LSU_TH(M)

4

3.3VIL3

GND

3

1

1

7

5

3

9

10

2

VDN

VDN(K)

VCONT

VCONT

3

MP(K)_RDY

4

PGND

VDP(K)

4

3.3VIL

1

3.3VIL

1

GND

GND

EN

SGND

8
9

GND

10

4

3

BD

BD

2

TH_LSU

LSU_TH

1

2

LSUMOTA

LSUMOTB

2

LSUCM

REM

1

24V

2

Summary of Contents for TASKalfa 2551ci

Page 1: ...SERVICE MANUAL Published in September 2016 842NP11A 2NPSM06A Rev A TASKalfa 2551ci ...

Page 2: ...ficials for details in your area for proper disposal ATTENTION IL Y A UN RISQUE D EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d égout municipales Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchet...

Page 3: ...of U411 1 3 143 1 3 145 1 3 146 Added This setting is usually unnecessary 1 3 32 Deleted Guide hook and Nylon clamp 1 3 37 Deleted Grounding terminal 2 4 1 Correction 1 List of maintenance parts 2 4 3 to 5 Added 3 Periodic maintenance procedures Address Correction 3 17 February 2014 1 1 2 Correction Item name change Power source Rated input 1 2 1 Correction 6 5A 7 2A 1 3 24 Added a comment for the...

Page 4: ... 8 Corection Transfer belt release motor TCBRM 2 3 14 2 3 27 2 3 30 2 3 38 2 4 23 Change to TCBRM from TCBM 6 4 September 2014 Contents Change Page numbers of the contents 1 5 31 to 36 Added Detaching and refitting the scanner wires 7 6 November 2014 1 1 1 Change Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki 1 3 9 1 3 158 Delate U474 2 3 46 Change Description of YC8 2 and YC8 6 8 3 Februry 2015 1 3 5 1 3 75 Change Inishal...

Page 5: ...rsonnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities ...

Page 6: ... this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com pliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol General warning Warning of risk of electric shock Warning of high temperature indicates a prohibited...

Page 7: ...d or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may cause fire Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct ...

Page 8: ... carefully Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may damage eyesight Handle the charger section...

Page 9: ... caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solve...

Page 10: ...This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 11: ...ender option for japan only 1 2 71 1 3 Maintenance Mode 1 3 1 Maintenance mode 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance item 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item list 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items 1 3 13 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 4 1 1 Paper misfeed indication 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection component 1 4 3 1 4 2 Self diagnostic function 1 4 13 1 Self diagnostic functio...

Page 12: ... 1 4 104 2 10 U044XX error code table Encrypted transmission 1 4 104 1 5 Assembly and disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 5 1 1 Precautions 1 5 1 2 Drum unit 1 5 1 3 Toner 1 5 1 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container 1 5 2 1 5 2 Outer covers 1 5 3 1 Detaching and refitting the front cover 1 5 3 2 Detaching and refitting the rear cover 1 5 4 3 Detaching and refitti...

Page 13: ...ng the engine PWB 1 5 42 2 1 Remarks on engine PWB replacement 1 5 44 3 Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 5 45 4 Detaching and refitting the power source PWB 1 5 53 5 Detaching and refitting the operation panel PWB main 1 5 54 6 Detaching and refitting the IH PWB 1 5 57 1 5 11 Others 1 5 58 1 Detaching and refitting the language sheet 1 5 58 2 Detaching and refitting the conveying uni...

Page 14: ...endixes 2 4 1 Appendixes 2 4 1 1 List of maintenance parts 2 4 1 2 Maintenance kits 2 4 2 3 Periodic maintenance procedures 2 4 3 4 Repetitive defects gauge 2 4 6 5 Firmware environment commands 2 4 7 6 System Error Fxxxx Outline 2 4 14 7 Chart of image adjustment procedures 2 4 19 8 Wiring diagram 2 4 21 Installation Guide DP 770 B Document processor DP 772 Document processor DP 773 Document proc...

Page 15: ...velope C4 Enve lope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Custom 216 340mm Zoom level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode 200 141 122 115 86 81 70 Copying speed Simplex Color B W Cassette MP tray Cassette MP tray A4 Letter 25 sheets min 17 sheets min 25 sheets min 17 sheets min A4R LetterR 17 sheets min 14 sheets min 17 sheets min 14 sheets min A3 Ledger 13 sheets min 10 sheets min 13...

Page 16: ...3 5GB When the Document Processor DP 772 is installed 4GB Maximum Interface Standard USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed USB host 4 USB Hi speed Network interface 1 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Option eKUIO slot 2 Resolution 600 600 dpi Operating environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft or less Brightness 1 500 lux or less Dimensions W D...

Page 17: ...sheets min 8 sheets min 9 sheets min 8 sheets min A3 Ledger 7 sheets min 6 sheets min 7 sheets min 6 sheets min B4 Legal 7 sheets min 6 sheets min 7 sheets min 6 sheets min B5 23 sheets min 16 sheets min 23 sheets min 16 sheets min B5R 9 sheets min 8 sheets min 9 sheets min 8 sheets min A5R 13 sheets min 9 sheets min 13 sheets min 9 sheets min First print time A4 feed from cassette B W 6 9 s Color...

Page 18: ... XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning speed Simplex B W 48 images min Color 48 images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Duplex B W 15 images min Color 15 images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000BASE T Network protocol TCP IP Transmission system PC transmission SMB Scan to PC FTP Sc...

Page 19: ...front side Figure 1 1 1 7 1 3 2 2 8 4 5 6 6 10 9 1 Cassette 2 Paper width guides 3 Paper length guide 4 MP multi purpose tray 5 MP tray extension 6 MP Paper width guides 7 Inner tray 8 Operation panel 9 USB memory slot 10 Main power switch ...

Page 20: ...er 15 Right registration roller 16 Secondary transfer roller 17 Feed shift guide 18 Fuser unit 19 Toner container Y 20 Toner container C 21 Toner container M 22 Toner container K 23 Drum unit Y 24 Drum unit C 25 Drum unit M 26 Drum unit K 27 Developer unit Y 28 Developer unit C 29 Developer unit M 30 Developer unit K 31 Duct holder 32 Right cover 2 33 Front cover ...

Page 21: ...interface connector cover 35 DP interface connector 36 Cassette heater switch 37 Inlet connector 38 Coin vender connector 39 Network interface connector 40 USB port 41 USB interface connector 42 Option interface slot 2 43 Option interface slot 1 44 FAX memory cover 45 Scanner lock cover ...

Page 22: ...r key 7 Quick no search key 8 Clear key 9 Reset key 10 Power key 11 Main power indicator 12 Help key 13 Accessibility display key 14 Send key 15 FAX key 16 Full color key 17 Job separator indicator 18 Black and White key 19 Processing indicator 20 Numeric keys 21 Memory indicator 22 Attention indicator 23 Enter key 24 Start key 25 Stop key 26 Interrupt key 27 Authentication Logout key 28 Energy sa...

Page 23: ...r feed section 4 Conveying section 5 Primary transfer section 6 Secondary transfer section Separation sections 7 Fuser unit 8 Eject section 9 Duplex conveyning section 10 Image scanner unit ISU 11 Charger roller unit 12 Toner container YCMK 13 Developer unit Y 14 Developer unit C 15 Developer unit M 16 Developer unit K 17 Drum unit Y 18 Drum unit C 19 Drum unit M 20 Drum unit K 21 Laser scanner un...

Page 24: ... change in the environmental temperature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface The degree of level 5 mm or less of front and rear right and left Twist 3 mm or less Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such a...

Page 25: ...ntenance mode Print out the user setting list Execution of initial setting operation Execution of mentenance item U952 Adjusting the image Clearing the counter maintenance item U927 Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Setting the delivery date maintenance item U278 Completion of the machine installation Switch the cassette heater switch Install the other optional devices 1 2 2 Unpack...

Page 26: ...12 15 10 11 7 8 19 12 12 16 12 20 Unpacking 1 Skid 2 Hinge joints 3 Bottom pad RF 4 Bottom pad RR 5 Bottom pad LF 6 Bottom pad LR 7 Bottom pad C 8 Poly bag 9 Accessory box 10 Pad F 11 Pad R 12 Stay 13 Outer case 14 Top pad 15 Machine 16 Pad LF 17 Installation guide etc 18 Poly bag 19 Power cord 20 Desiccant ...

Page 27: ...es from the main unit Figure 1 2 3 4 Remove three tapes and remove the operation unit protection cover 5 Remove the operation panel protecton sheet Figure 1 2 4 Remove the tapes and spacer Tape Protection pad Tape Tape Tape Tape Paper Tape Operation unit protection cover Tape Tape Tape Operation panel protection sheet ...

Page 28: ...r details Figure 1 2 5 1 Take out the paper preservation bag 2 Pressing the paper width adjusting tab as shown move the paper width guides to fit the paper size Figure 1 2 6 Install the optional paper feeder Paper feeder Main unit Load paper Cassette Paper width guides Paper width adjusting tab Paper preservation bag ...

Page 29: ... to fit the paper size Figure 1 2 7 4 Align the paper so that it is abut with the right end of the cassette 5 Insert the cassette size plate 6 Gently push the cassette back in Figure 1 2 8 Paper length guide Paper Cassette Cassette size plate ...

Page 30: ...es or more Turn the toner container upside down and tap the upper part five times or more Figure 1 2 9 3 Shake the toner container up and down five times or more Turn the toner container upside down and shake it five times or more Figure 1 2 10 Install the toner container Toner container Toner container ...

Page 31: ... five or six times in the horizontal direction to stir toner Figure 1 2 11 5 Gently push the toner container into the machine Note Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place Figure 1 2 12 Toner container Toner container CLICK ...

Page 32: ... then remove the switch cover 2 Turn the cassette heater switch on Note When the cassette heater is used it turns it on 3 Refit the switch cover Figure 1 2 13 Switch the cassette heater switch Cassette heater switch Switch cover Hook ...

Page 33: ... panel Figure 1 2 15 3 Remove the operation panel sheet 4 Replace the operation panel sheet of the corresponding language 5 Refit the clear panel 6 Refit the operation panel covers A and B Figure 1 2 16 Attaching the language label Excluding 240V AC model Operation panel cover A Operation panel cover B Clear panel Operation panel sheet ...

Page 34: ...the upper and lower sides of a scanner lock cover and then refit it Releases the lock of the scanner unit If a lock is not released when a power supply is switched on an error mes sage C3100 will be displayed Figure 1 2 17 Install the other optional devices Release the scanner lock Scanner lock cover Flat screw driver Scanner lock cover Locked Released ...

Page 35: ... The machine automatically starts to feed toner in the developer unit Note When the main power switch is turned on for the first time it takes about five minutes until entering the state that can be copied 2 The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed Connect the power cord Power cord Wall outlet Execution of initial setting operation ...

Page 36: ...t to perform Color registration When completed press OK Manual correction Press Next in Manual Press Print of Chart A chart is printed Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match Press Next of Registration and Change Enter the registration values for each chart Press Start to perform Color registration When completed press OK 3 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see pag...

Page 37: ... the stop key to exit Clearing the counter maintenance item U927 1 Enter 927 using the numeric keys and press the start key 2 Select Excute 3 Press the start key The counter is cleared 4 Press the stop key to exit Setrting the delivery date maintenance item U278 1 Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key 2 Select Today 3 Press the start key The delivery date is set 4 Press the stop...

Page 38: ...ng for copy counting Eject U265 Setting OEM purchaser code U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode0 U278 Setting the delivery date U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Off U285 Setting service status page On U325 Setting the paper interval 1 U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On 8 U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1 0 0 1 0 2 5 U340 Setting the applied mode 0 10 U341 Specific paper feed...

Page 39: ...on FAX System W B Expansion memory MM 16 128 Network interface IB 50 Wireless LAN interface IB 51 Data security kit E Internet FAX kit B Printed document guard kit B Thin Print UG 33 Upgrade kit UG 34 Card Authentication KIT B IC card reader Card Reader Holder B Document tray DT 730 B Key card MK 2 Key counter USB keyboard USB keyboard holder B ...

Page 40: ...610008 H01 Wire saddle C 1 7YZM610009 H01 Parts Quantity Part No Key counter socket assembly 1 3029236241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTP...

Page 41: ...e Take out the wire from the central portion of the key counter retainer as shown in a figure 3 Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using two screws 4 Fit the key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws Figure 1 2 19 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw 1 B1B03080 M4 x 30 tap tight S screw 1 B1B54300 M4 x 6 chrome TP screw 5 B4A04060 M4 x 10 chrome TP screw 2 B4A04100 Part...

Page 42: ...lease three hooks 7 Remove the rear cover Figure 1 2 20 8 Remove two screws and then remove the scanner right cover 9 Remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 21 Screw Screw Screw Screw Screws Screw Screw Rear cover Hooks Hook Right upper cover Screw Scanner right cover Screw ...

Page 43: ...he aperture plate right side on the right upper cover using nippers Figure 1 2 22 11 Remove two screws and then remove the scanner rear cover Figure 1 2 23 Right upper cover Aperture plate Ribs Screw Scanner rear cover Screw ...

Page 44: ...oks of the thir 13 Attach the edging to the aperture part Figure 1 2 24 14 Pass the key counter electrical wires through the wire saddle B and the wire saddle C and then pull out from the aperture part Figure 1 2 25 Wire saddle B Wire saddle C Edging Connector Wire saddle B Wire saddle C Aperture Key counter electrical wires ...

Page 45: ...t side in the right upper cover Note Be careful not to put a key coun ter electric wire with the upper right cover 19 Fit the scanner right cover using two screws Figure 1 2 26 20 Insert the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture of the right upper cover 21 Fit the key counter cover retainer using the two M4 x 10 screws Figure 1 2 27 Edging Wire saddle C Connector Option PWB ...

Page 46: ... main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 27 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page P 1 3 93 28 Exit the maintenance mode 29 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 30 Check that the counter counts up as copies are made Figure 1 2 28 Key counter cover Key counter elecrtical wi...

Page 47: ...rts Quantity Part No Key counter socket assembly 1 3029236241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTPB4010TW R M3 x 6 bronze flat head screw 2 7B...

Page 48: ...tral portion of the key counter retainer as shown in a figure 3 Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using two screws 4 Fit the key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws Figure 1 2 29 M4 x 10 chrome TP screw 2 B4A04100 Parts Quantity Part No Tray stay 1 Tray mount 1 Tray cover 1 302LC04601 Tray lower cover 1 302LC04710 Tray retainer 1 Sheet 2 302LC04660 Pin 2 303...

Page 49: ...release three hooks 7 Remove the rear cover Figure 1 2 30 8 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 9 Remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 31 Screw Screw Screw Screw Screws Screw Screw Rear cover Hooks Hook Right upper cover Screw Scanner right cover Screw ...

Page 50: ...ght upper cover using nippers Note Cut off the rib lower part certainly so that a projection does not remain Figure 1 2 32 11 Remove two screws and then remove the scanner rear cover Figure 1 2 33 Right upper cover Aperture Ribs Rib lower part Screw Scanner rear cover Screw ...

Page 51: ...dging to the aperture part Figure 1 2 34 14 Pass the key counter electrical wires through the wire saddle B and the wire saddle C and then pull out from the aperture part 15 Pass the key counter wire through the edging Figure 1 2 35 Wire saddle B Wire saddle C Edging Connector Wire saddle C Binding band Aperture Wire saddle B Key counter electrical wires ...

Page 52: ...y counter wire through the aperture right side in the right upper cover Note Be careful not to put a key coun ter electric wire with the upper right cover 20 Fit the scanner right cover using two screws Figure 1 2 36 21 Fit the tray stay to the scanner right cover using two screws Figure 1 2 37 Edging Connector Option PWB Key counter electrical wires Key counter electrical wires Aperture Scanner r...

Page 53: ...2NP 1 2 30 22 Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two screws Figure 1 2 38 M4 8 screw M4 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount ...

Page 54: ...4 Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using four screws Figure 1 2 39 25 Fit the key counter cover retainer using two screws Figure 1 2 40 M4 x 8 screws Aperture Tray cover Tray cover M4 x 8 screws Key counter cover retainer M4 x 20 tap tight S screw M4 x 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 55: ...nt table 27 Fit the key counter cover to the docu ment table using the screw 28 Connect the key counter signal cable to the key counter electrical wire Figure 1 2 41 Aperture Key counter cover Key counter signal cable Key counter signal cable Key counter electrical wire M4 x 6 screw ...

Page 56: ...NP 1 2 33 29 Fit the tray lower cover Note Install the key counter signal cable and key counter electrical wire so that they are held behind the tray lower cover Figure 1 2 42 Tray lower cover Connector ...

Page 57: ... assembly 34 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 35 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page P 1 3 93 36 Exit the maintenance mode 37 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 38 Check that the counter counts up as copies are made Figure 1 2 44 Pin Tray lower cover P...

Page 58: ...y on the operation panel to off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove two pins and then remove the slot cover of the OPT2 Figure 1 2 45 Parts Quantity Part No Gigabit ethernet board 1 1505JV0UN0 option Slot cover Pin Pin OPT2 ...

Page 59: ... 2 Caution Do not directly touch the giga bit ethernet board terminal Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit ethernet board or the projection of the board to insert the gigabit ethernet board Figure 1 2 46 4 Plug the modular connector cable into the line terminal Figure 1 2 47 Pin Groove Pin Gigabit ethernet board Modular connector cable ...

Page 60: ...off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove the staple holder 3 Remove a screw and then remove the staple cover Figure 1 2 48 Parts Quantity Part No IC card reader holder 1 1709AD0UN1 option Parts Quantity Part No IC card reader holder 1 Label 1 Bundling band 1 Hook an...

Page 61: ...s depending type of IC card readers Type A Thicker and in the same size as its holder Continue to step 6 Type B Thicker but smaller than its holder Continue to step 8 Type C Thinner and in the same size as its holder Continue to step 11 Figure 1 2 50 Upper cover B Lock part Type A Type B Type C IC card reader ...

Page 62: ...rd reader and IC card reader holder 7 Mount the IC card reader to the IC card reader holder Proceed to step 10 Figure 1 2 51 IC card reader Type A IC card reader holder Hook and loop fasteners Hook and loop fasteners IC card reader holder IC card reader Type A ...

Page 63: ...stener onto the IC card reader so that it is mounted on the holder with both being flush with the right side edges 9 Mount the IC card reader to the IC card reader holder Figure 1 2 52 IC card reader Type B IC card reader holder Hook and loop fasteners Hook and loop fasteners IC card reader holder IC card reader Type B ...

Page 64: ... Route the USB cable from the IC card reader through the IC card reader holder ribs wind four timesaround its back and route through another rib Proceed to step 15 Figure 1 2 53 IC card reader holder USB cable Ribs ...

Page 65: ... side of the spacer where an adhesive tape has been affixed Affix two spacers to the IC card reader 13 Mount the IC card reader to the IC card reader holder Figure 1 2 54 IC card reader Type C IC card reader holder Hook and loop fasteners IC card reader holder IC card reader Type C Spacer Spacer Hook and loop fasteners ...

Page 66: ...gh the ribs at the bottom of the IC card reader holder wind around its back and route through the rib on the left hand side Make sure the cable will have a slack of about 15 cm Figure 1 2 55 About 15 cm IC card reader holder USB cable Rib bottom USB cable Rib left ...

Page 67: ...the machine Figure 1 2 56 16 For only type A or B of the IC card reader bundle the surplus length of the cable and insert it into the wire holder Note It pushes also into the crevice between a scanner and a cover Figure 1 2 57 IC card reader holder fixing part Hooks IC card reder holder Wire holder Wire guides USB wire ...

Page 68: ...older is planned to be added connect it to the connector on the far end Figure 1 2 58 18 Affix a label on the upper cover B align ing it with the positioning mark Fix it by matching with a smoke of a dif ferent color Figure 1 2 59 USB wire USB connector Upper cover B Label Positioning mark ...

Page 69: ...over B by sliding and uniting two projections and two holes Figure 1 2 60 20 Replace the staple cover and the staple holder in their original positions Figure 1 2 61 Upper cover B Projections Holes Screw Staple holder Staple cover ...

Page 70: ...you need to log in with admin istrator privileges 3 Press Next of Optional Function 4 Select CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT B and press Activate 5 The License Key entry screen is displayed Enter the License Key using the numeric keys and press Official 6 Confirm the product name CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT B and press Yes 7 To use a SSFC card run maintenance mode U222 and set SSFC When the machine has entere...

Page 71: ...ff the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove the staple holder 3 Remove a screw Figure 1 2 62 Parts Quantity Part No Keyboard holder B 1 1709AF0UN1 option Parts Quantity Part No Upper keyboard holder 1 Lower keyboard holder 1 Upper keyboard cover 1 Lower keyboard cover 1 Cable cover 1 Upper lid 1 Lower lid 1 Hook and loop fastener 2 Bundling band 2 M4 x 14...

Page 72: ...1 2 49 4 Remove a screw Figure 1 2 63 5 Fit the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the machine using the two S Tite screws M4 x 14 Figure 1 2 64 Screw S Tite screws M4 x 14 Lower keyboard mounting bracket ...

Page 73: ... upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mount ing bracket using the four S Tite screws M3 x 8 Align them with each other at the mark B Figure 1 2 66 Lower lid Lower lid Hook S Tite screws M3 x 8 A B S Tite screws M3 x 8 Upper keyboard mounting bracket Upper keyboard mounting bracket Lower keyboard mounting bracket S Tite screw M3 x 8 ...

Page 74: ...ning pins at the bottom of the lower keyboard cover in the holes on the keyboard mounting bracket and slide towards the rear 11 Latch the lower keyboard cover with the upper keyboard mount by the five hooks Figure 1 2 68 Cutaway portion Lower keyboard cover hole hooks hooks hole Upper keyboard mount Lower keyboard cover Positioning pins ...

Page 75: ...cket using the two P Tite screws M3 x 8 Figure 1 2 69 13 Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket using the two P Tite screws M3 x 8 Figure 1 2 70 Lower keyboard cover P Tite screws M3 x 8 Upper keyboard cover S Tite screws M3 x 8 S Tite screws M3 x 8 ...

Page 76: ...loop fas teners on the upper keyboard cover Figure 1 2 71 15 Fix the keyboard with the hook and loop fasteners 16 Connect the USB cable with the USB connector on the machine Figure 1 2 72 Hook and loop fasteners Key board USB cable USB connector ...

Page 77: ...undle the surplus length of the cable with two bundling bands and hook it on the hook of the upper keyboard cover Figure 1 2 73 18 Slide the upper lid and fix in the machine Figure 1 2 74 Hook Bunding bands Upper lid ...

Page 78: ...the machine Latch the three hooks at the near end and press the hooks downwards to mate with the holes at the far end Figure 1 2 75 20 Replace the staple holder Figure 1 2 76 Cable cover Hook Hook Hook Cable cover Holes Hole Staple holder ...

Page 79: ...off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove eight screws 3 Pull the rear cover upwards and then release three hooks 4 Remove the rear cover 5 When not using DP junction PWB the following procedures 6 to 11 are fol lowed and when using it Procedure 13 to 20 is performed Figure 1 2 77 Parts Quantity Part No Printed Document Guard Kit B 1 1503P40UN0 Parts Q...

Page 80: ...he FFC into the copy guard PWB until it clicks in WIthout a DP junction PWB A FFC is used at YC2 serigraphed on MAIN Figure 1 2 78 8 Fit the copy guard PWB by hooking to two hooks of the IH cover and using the screw M3 x 6 Figure 1 2 79 Copy guard PWB YC2 MAIN FFC long Screw Mount plate B Screw Copy guard PWB Hook Hook ...

Page 81: ... aperture section of the controller box Figure 1 2 80 11 Connect the main circuit PWB with the FFC Main PWB YC34 12 Refit the DP junction PWB cover and the rear cover Figure 1 2 81 Screw FFC Controller box aperture part Screw DP junction PWB cover FFC connector Copy guard PWB Main PWB YC34 ...

Page 82: ...py guard PWB until it clicks in WIth a DP junction PWB A FFCs is used at YC2 serigraphed on MAIN YC1 Serigraphed on DP Figure 1 2 82 15 IFit the copy guard PWB by hooking to two hooks of the IH cover and using the screw Figure 1 2 83 Copy guard PWB YC2 MAIN YC1 DP FFC long FFC long Screw Mount plate B Screw Copy guard PWB Hook Hook ...

Page 83: ...on of the controller box Figure 1 2 84 18 Connect the main circuit PWB with the FFC Main PWB YC34 When DP connection board has already stuck work after removing Refer to Procedure 19 Figure 1 2 85 Screw FFC Controller box aperture part Screw DP junction PWB cover FFC connector Copy guard PWB Main PWB YC34 ...

Page 84: ...e 1 2 87 Confirm the settings 1 Turn the main power switch on 2 Press the system menu key then System Network 3 The user authentication dialog is shown if user authentication is not enabled Enter the login user name and the login password then press Login Use an administrator privilege for login 4 Confirm that the Confidential Guard is set to On Screw DP junction PWB Screw FFC connector Copy guard...

Page 85: ...ty Part No Key card MK 2 1 8J272002 option MK 2 mount 1 Supplied with MK 2 M4 x 16 screw 2 Document table 1 1902LC0UN2 option Bushing 1 M1203490 Mount 1 78660130 M3 8 tap tight p screw TP 2 7BB202308H M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB100420H Parts Quantity Part No Tray stay 1 Tray mount 1 Tray cover 1 302LC04601 Tray lower cover 1 302LC04710 Tray retainer 1 Sheet 2 302LC04660 Pin 2 303NS24410 M4 nut...

Page 86: ... rear cover using nippers etc Figure 1 2 88 5 Pass the key card wires through the bandage lid bushing and the aperture parts of the rear cover 6 Connect the connector of the key card wires to the option PWB Figure 1 2 89 Aperture part Screw Screw Screws Screw Rear cover Hooks Hook Screw Screw Screw Key card wires Bushing Bandage lid Connector Key card wires Option PWB ...

Page 87: ...ks 10 Fit the rear cover using eight screws Pull out the slack electric wires inside a machine 11 Adjust the position of the bushing that is passed key card wires through and then fix the bandage lid using two screws Figure 1 2 91 Key card wires Grounding wire Screw Wire saddles Grounding terminal Key card wires Bushing Bandage lid Screws Screw Screw Screws Screw Rear cover Hooks Hook Screw Screw ...

Page 88: ...2NP 1 1 2 65 12 Fit the tray stay to the scanner right cover using two M4 10 screws Figure 1 2 92 Scanner right cover M4 10 screw M4 10 screw Tray stay ...

Page 89: ...2NP 1 1 2 66 13 Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 93 M4 8 screw M4 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount ...

Page 90: ...g four M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 94 15 Remove the four screws securing the MK 2 cover attach the MK 2 mount to the MK 2 and secure using the four screws Figure 1 2 95 M4 8 screws Tray cover Try stay M4 8 screws MK 2 mount Screws Screws Screws Screws MK 2 MK 2 ...

Page 91: ... 2 68 16 Fit the MK 2 to the document table using two M4 x 20 tap tight S screws Secure the screws to the location with mark B Figure 1 2 96 MK 2 Document table M4 20 tap tight S screw M4 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 92: ...2NP 1 1 2 69 17 Fit the tray lower cover 18 Secure the tray lower cover with two pins Figure 1 2 97 Tray lower cover Pin Pin ...

Page 93: ...t onto right side of the document table 20 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 21 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Card see page 1 3 93 22 Exit the maintenance mode Figure 1 2 98 Sheet Document table ...

Page 94: ... indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove eight screws 3 Pull the rear cover upwards and then release three hooks 4 Remove the rear cover Figure 1 2 99 Parts Quantity Part No Coin vender 1 ACV 1 option Vender wire 1 Supplied with coin vender Vender base 1 M4 x 6 screw 4 M4 8 ground screw 1 Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw...

Page 95: ...he vender wire socket with two screws removed in step 5 8 Secure the grounding terminal of the vender wire to IF mount with the screw 9 Connect the vender wire connector to the vender signal cable connector Figure 1 2 101 Screw Screw Bandage lid Screw Grounding terminal Screw Vender wire socket IF mount Screw Vender signal cable connector Vender wire connector ...

Page 96: ... vender wire socket 12 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 13 Run maintenance mode U206 and acti vate Coin vender is installed Continue configuring the coin vender required see page 1 3 94 14 Exit the maintenance mode Figure 1 2 102 Coin vender signal cable Vender wire socket ...

Page 97: ...2NP 1 1 2 74 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 98: ...meric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop key Press the start key Start End Maintenance mode is entered The maintenance item is selected Maintenance mode is exited Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item No No Yes Yes Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys and...

Page 99: ...DD formatting U025 Firmware Update Security U026 Pulling Backup Data Drive paper feed and paper conveying system U030 Checking the operation of the motors U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper convey ing U032 Checking the operation of the clutches U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids U034 Adjusting the print start timing LSU Out Top LSU Out Left 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U035 Setting the pr...

Page 100: ...canner operation 100 10200 1 U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 1 U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation 145 145 145 U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern U091 Setting the white line correction 112 112 112 75 0 U099 Adjusting original size detection With original mat With document feeder 0 0 0 0 0 20 30 40 20 30 40 20 30 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0 0 0 0 High volt age U...

Page 101: ...3 68 47 32 43 30 22 45 31 21 40 33 25 59 42 31 78 53 40 83 55 38 60 41 31 64 43 30 43 30 22 45 31 21 U107 Setting the voltage for the intermediate transfer cleaning Belt A Belt B Belt C 60 30 45 60 30 45 90 45 68 90 45 68 90 45 68 90 45 68 U108 Setting separation shift bias Ligjt Normal1 Normal2 3 Heavy1 Coated Timing 20 20 10 12 10 10 10 10 3 0 0 100 U110 Checking the drum count 0 0 0 0 U111 Chec...

Page 102: ... 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 1500 1500 1500 1500 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 120V U147 Setting for toner applying operation 0 60 U150 Checking sensors for toner U157 Checking the developer drive time 0 0 0 0 U158 Checking the developer count 0 0 0 0 Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature 210 240 190 110 110 125 150 155 15...

Page 103: ...10 10 100 50 30 50 Apl Off Apl Charge Mode 10 10 10 10 10 Boot Mode Normal U207 Checking the operation panel keys U209 Set RTC Real Time Clock Date A4 U221 Setting the USB host lock function Off U222 Setting the IC card type Other U223 Operation panel lock Unlock U224 Panel sheet extension U234 Setting punch destination U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0 0 U240 Checking the operation of the fi...

Page 104: ... factor Rate Mode Level 1 Level 2 1 0 0 1 0 2 5 U340 Setting the applied mode Adj Memory Adj Max Job 0 10 U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Off Off Off U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Off U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0 U346 Selecting Sleep Mode On Image processing U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 9 U403 Ad...

Page 105: ...hart2 CCD N875 N475 N125 C M Y R G B Adjust Original 85 4 0 0 1 1 52 0 1 3 2 4 21 0 0 5 2 5 55 2 29 7 45 0 45 9 71 2 2 1 86 3 9 8 89 1 45 5 63 2 43 3 48 4 70 6 25 9 23 6 21 3 42 9 15 0 10 0 190 0 Chart2 DP N950 N850 N770 N650 N500 N300 C M Y R G B 15 0 15 0 390 0 93 4 0 5 0 3 86 5 0 1 1 5 78 2 0 5 1 4 65 9 0 4 2 6 52 9 0 6 2 3 30 6 0 4 2 8 54 3 27 7 46 1 44 8 72 1 5 7 87 4 11 9 94 1 44 5 63 4 42 1...

Page 106: ...tration data Auto C Auto M Auto Y Manual C Manual M Manual Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U469 Adjusting the color registration Regist U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio Copy Photo Text Send Photo Text HC PDF BG HC PDF Char HC PDF File size System 90 90 90 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 15 25 90 15 25 90 15 75 90...

Page 107: ...to Reduct Setting Protocol List On Off U615 Setting system 6 Ledger U620 Setting the remote switching mode One U625 Setting the transmission system 1 Setting Interval Setting Times 2 3 U630 Setting communication control 1 Setting TX Speed Setting RX Speed Setting TX Echo Setting RX Echo 14400bps V17 14400bps 300 75 U631 Setting communication control 2 Setting ECM TX Setting ECM RX Setting CED Freq...

Page 108: ...Out Setting Td Time Out 56 36 69 30 20 80 60 6 U650 Setting modem 1 Setting Reg G3 TX Eqr Setting Reg G3 RX Eqr Setting RX Mdm Level 0dB 0dB 43dBm U651 Setting modem 2 Modem output level DTMF output level main value DTMF output level level difference 11 8 2 U660 Setting the NCU Setting Exchange Setting Dial Tone Setting Busy Tone Setting PBX Setting Setting DC Loop PSTN On On Loop On U670 Outputti...

Page 109: ...backup data reading writing U920 Checking the copy counts 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only U928 Checking machine life counts 0 U933 Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0 0 0 U952 Maintenance mode workflow U964 Checking of log U969 Checking of toner area code U977 Data capture mode U984 ...

Page 110: ... to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method Outputs the report 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output 3 Select Print 4 Press the start key A list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location The output status is displayed Display Output list Maintenance List of the current settings of the ma...

Page 111: ... slot 3 Turn the main power switch on 4 Enter the maintenance item 5 Press the start key 6 Select the item to be send 7 Press the start key Output will be sent to the USB memory Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Output list USB Text Sends output data to the USB memory text type USB HTML Sends output data to the USB...

Page 112: ...prions 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 Service Call Log 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count 1881214 178944 5296 5295 2099 1054 809 30 Service Code 01 6000 01 2100 01 4000 01 ...

Page 113: ... type e Paper eject a Cause of paper jam Hexadecimal For details on the case of paper jam refer to Paper Misfeed Detection P 1 4 3 b Detail of paper source Hexadecimal 00 MP tray 01 Cassette 1 02 Cassette 2 03 Cassette 3 paper feeder 04 Cassette 4 paper feeder 05 to 09 Reserved c Detail of paper size Hexadecimal 00 Not specified 01 Monarch 02 Business 03 International DL 04 International C5 05 Exe...

Page 114: ...ors are logged The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error Self diagnostic error code See page 1 4 13 Example 01 6000 01 Self diagnostic error 6000 Self diagnostic error code number 10 Maintenance Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replacement If the occurrence of the previous replace ment of toner con tainer is less than 8 all of the occur rences of replace ment a...

Page 115: ... of the toner con tainer f Paper jam g Self diagnostic error h Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances includ ing those are not occurred are dis played Indicates the log counter of self diag nostics errors depending on cause See page 1 3 16 Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has hap pened four times Indi...

Page 116: ...onnected UG 34 Installed US English Scan extension kit A Not Installed FAX Information Slot1 Slot2 Rings Normal Rings FAX TEL Rings TAD Option DIMM Size 3 3 3 16 MB Print Coverage Average Total K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 Copy K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 Printer K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 FAX K 1 10 Period Last Page K C M Y Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 1111111 11 2222222 22 3333333 33 4444444 ...

Page 117: ...000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000...

Page 118: ...r absence of the IC card authentication kit Installed Not Installed Trial 16 Presence or absence of the internet fax kit Installed Not Installed 17 Presence or absence of the data security kit Installed Not Installed 18 Presence or absence of the UG 33 Installed Not Installed 19 Presence or absence of the UG 34 Installed Not Installed 20 Presence or absence of the USB keyboard Connected Not connec...

Page 119: ...the engine software version and the date of update 37 RP code Code the main software version and the date of update 38 RP code Code the engine software version and the date of the previous update 39 RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous update 40 NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225 a b c d e f a Consistency of the present software version and the database _ underscor...

Page 120: ...unit K Drum unit C Drum unit M Drum unit Y Transfer belt unit Developer unit K Developer unit C Developer unit M Developer unit Y Maintenance kit A Maintenance kit B Maintenance kit C 51 Panel lock information 0 Off 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock 52 USB information U00 Not installed U01 Full speed U02 Hi speed 53 Paper handling information 0 Paper source unit select 1 Paper source unit 54 Color printi...

Page 121: ... 3 Vellum 4 Heavy 1 Duplex settings 5 Heavy 2 0 Disable 6 Heavy 3 1 Enable 7 Extra Heavy 66 Calibration information Black Cyan Magenta Yellow 67 Calibration information 68 69 Calibration information 70 Calibration information 71 Calibration information 72 Calibration information 73 Calibration information 74 75 76 77 Calibration information 78 Calibration information 79 RFID information 80 RFID re...

Page 122: ...ng 0 1 to 100 0 90 Middle coverage setting 0 1 to 100 0 91 Data Sanitization information 92 Toner low setting 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 93 Toner low detection level 5 to 100 94 A shift restriction setup an one sheet manuscript 0 Enabled Shift restrictions off 1 Disabled Shift restrictions on 95 Full page printing mode 0 Normal Mode at Time of Factory Shipments 1 Full Page Mode 96 Drum serial number Bla...

Page 123: ...mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Mode1 All 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance...

Page 124: ...e number Purpose To check or set the machine number Method 1 Press the start key If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Writing of serial No starts 3 Turn the main power switch off and ...

Page 125: ...mandatory to contain 3 Select New ID Reconfirm 4 Enter a new 8 digit ID on ten keys 0 9 5 Press the start key The setting is set Method Initialize 1 Select Initialize 2 Press the start key ID is initialized Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description New ID Enter a new 8 digit ID New ID Reconfirm Enter a new 8 di...

Page 126: ...ncorrect the following are displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description EXpected Displays the expected checksum Result Displays the calculated checksum Execute Perform the self investigation Display Description f001 An expected value file does not exist f002 Reading the expected value file failed f003 Il...

Page 127: ...irmware MMI Operation firmware Panel Main Operation firmware Panel Boot Operation booting Browser Browser firmware Engine Engine firmware Engine Boot Engine booting Scanner Scanner firmware Scanner Boot Scanner booting RFID RFID firmware IH CPU IH CPU firmware IH CPU Boot IH CPU booting Dictionary Dictionary software Option Language Optional language firmware OCR OCR software Color Table1 Copy Col...

Page 128: ...Boot Paper feeder booting DF Document finisher firmware DF Boot Document finisher booting MT Mailbox firmware MT BOOT Mailbox booting Fax APL1 FAX APL1 Fax Boot1 FAX boot1 Fax IPL1 FAX IPL1 Fax APL2 FAX APL2 multi port Fax Boot2 FAX boot multi port Fax IPL2 FAX IPL2 multi port Mode1 Installed application name Mode2 Installed application name Mode3 Installed application name Mode4 Installed applica...

Page 129: ... 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute...

Page 130: ... Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U025 Firmware Update Security Description Used to execute FW Update from the USB flash device while Very High is selected in the Secu rity Level settings under the System Menu Purpose Firmware upgrading is initiated by a service person to conduct U025 while a USB flash device is inserted Method 1 Press the start ke...

Page 131: ...r Purpose To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed Conveying motor CM is turned on Exit CW Eject motor EM is turned on clock...

Page 132: ...etected to be in the ON position the display for that switch or sensor will be 1 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Switches and sensors Regist Registration sensor RS Fuser Fuser pre sensor FUPS Duplex Duplex sensor DUS Feed2 Feed sensor 2 FS2 FeedDown Tray Full Paper full sensor PFS Job Separator Full JOB paper ful...

Page 133: ...of each solenoid Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the solenoid to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 is turned on Feed2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 is turned on Regist Registrat...

Page 134: ...justment LSU Out Top 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output a test pattern 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted Large size 218 mm or more in width of paper Item No Description Display Description LSU Out Top Leading edge registration adjustment LSU Out Left Center line adjustment Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step...

Page 135: ...nu key 2 Press the start key to output a test pattern 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted Item No Description Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Leading edge registration 20 1 5 mm U034 U066 P 1 3 46 U071 P 1 3 51 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step MPT Paper feed from MP tray 128 to 127 0 0 1 mm Cassette1 Paper feed from...

Page 136: ... key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Center line of printing within 0 5 mm Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 U034 U067 P 1 3 47 U072 P 1 3 53 ...

Page 137: ...7 Checking the operation of the fan motors Description Drives each fan motor Purpose To check the operation of each fan motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the fan motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Descrip...

Page 138: ...Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflec tion Figure 1 3 6 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Displ...

Page 139: ...y The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Full Speed correction value setting at full velocity Half Speed correction value setting at half velocity 3 4 Speed correction value setting at 3 4 velocity Display Description Setting range Feed Conveying motor 1 CM1 speed adjustment 50 to 50 Exit Eject motor EM speed adjustment 40 to 40 Drum CMY ...

Page 140: ... tion should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Position 3 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this m...

Page 141: ... start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Adjustment Main Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 7 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description U065 main scan ning direction U065 auxiliary scan ning direction Display Descript...

Page 142: ...eric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 8 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 ...

Page 143: ...For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 9 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Settin...

Page 144: ...eric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Descrip...

Page 145: ...en the setting value is decreased 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 Select Black Line 6 Change the setting using the cursor keys or numeric keys 7 Press the start key The value is set 8 Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key 9 Press the start key Test copy is executed 10 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value f...

Page 146: ...ys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Figure 1 3 11 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Sub Scan F Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD first side...

Page 147: ...he value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image Figure 1 3 12 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 ...

Page 148: ...ing Change in value per step Front Head Leading edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 66 to 66 0 0 0 085 mm 0 085 mm Front Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 66 to 66 0 0 0 085 mm 0 085 mm Back Head Leading edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 66 to 66 0 0 0 085 mm 0 085 mm Back Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 66 to 66 0 0 0 085 m...

Page 149: ... above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes Adjustment Trailing edge registration 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 14 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and...

Page 150: ...value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 15 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a mai...

Page 151: ...et 5 Select Execute 6 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 7 To stop operation press the stop key Item No Description Display Description Scanner Motor Scanner operation Home Position Home position operation Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on DP Reading DP scanning position operation Display Operating conditions Setting range Zoom Magnification 25 to...

Page 152: ...the luminosity correction for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original is scanned from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Settings 0 No correction 1 Slight correction 2 Medium correction 3 Strong correction 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While ...

Page 153: ...rt key 2 Select the item to be set Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys Decreasing the setting makes the objects with less density recognized as dusts less dusts becomes detectable Increasing the value allows more dusts to be detected and the cleaning prompts to be dis played more often 3 Press the start key The value is set Method Black Line 1 Selec...

Page 154: ... maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display PG pattern to be output Purpose 256GRADATION 256 gradation PG To check the gradation reproducibility COLOR BELT Four color belts PG To check the developer state and the engine section ID GRAY C Cyan PG To check the drum quality GRAY M Magenta PG To check the drum quality GRAY Y Yellow PG To check the drum quality GRAY K Black PG To chec...

Page 155: ...on the blank or gray band page and vertical white lines appear on the black band in the same position clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat white line correction If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets white line correction has been completed normally However the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine and thus the engine must be checked 8 Pres...

Page 156: ...tion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures No lines No lines Complete Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS glass Clean CIS roller or CIS glass and then perform U091 again Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends check engine No lines White lines Engine side U091 ends check en...

Page 157: ...ermines the width of the document The original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal The document is detected two times when the DP is installed Item No Description Display Description Data1 Displaying original size sensor transmission data B W Level1 B W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Data2 Displaying original size se...

Page 158: ...ing Original R1 Original threshold value for color R near side 0 to 255 20 50 Original R2 Original threshold value for color R center 0 to 255 30 50 Original R3 Original threshold value for color R far side 0 to 255 40 50 Original G1 Original threshold value for color G near side 0 to 255 20 50 Original G2 Original threshold value for color G center 0 to 255 30 50 Original G3 Original threshold va...

Page 159: ...e screen for executing each item is displayed Setting Mode 1 Select the item The screen for executing each item is displayed Initial setting Auto Item No Description Display Description Base MC DC bias High Altitude MC high ground compensation mode MCH MCH compensation Protect Table Drum protection control table Drum Aging Aging for an electrification roller Display Description Mode MC compensatio...

Page 160: ...nu key Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting C Manual adjustment value Cyan 200 to 200 0 M Manual adjustment value Magenta 200 to 200 0 Y Manual adjustment value Yellow 200 to 200 0 K Manual adjustment value Black 200 to 200 0 Default C Manual adjustment base value Cyan 0 to 250 Default M Manual adjustment base value Magenta 0 to 250 Default Y Manual adjustment base...

Page 161: ...ect table 1 Select an item to be set Initial setting Mode0 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting Drum Aging 1 Select an item to be set Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key when main charger output stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Mode0 Standard Factory setting Mode1...

Page 162: ...t the item to be set 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Base Standard value 1st side Correction value of single side printing 2nd side Correction value of duplex printing B W Correction value of monochrome printing Display Description Setting range Initial setting Full Full speed printing 0 to 100...

Page 163: ...s maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Value Correction value 50 to 50 30 ...

Page 164: ...using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Color Correction value of color printing B W Correction value of monochrome printing Display Description Light Normal1 Weight of paper light to usual 1 Normal2 3 Weight of paper usual 2 to 3 Heavy1 Weight of paper heavy 1 Heavy2 3 Weight of paper heavy 2 to 3 OHP Kind of paper OHP Coated K...

Page 165: ...or selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Width 160 width of paper 160 0 to 200 40 59 160 Width 220 160 width of paper 220 0 to 200 33 42 220 Width 220 width of paper 0 to 200 25 31 Display Description Light Normal3 Weight of paper light to usual 3 Heavy1 Weight of paper heavy 1 Heavy2 3 Weight of paper heavy 2 to 3 Displa...

Page 166: ...start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Belt A Correction value of belt A Belt B Correction value of belt B Belt C Correction value of belt C Display Description Setting range Initial setting Full Full speed printing of color 0 to 200 60 90 90 Half Half speed printing of color 0 to ...

Page 167: ...ess the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Light Normal1 Weight of paper light to usual 1 Normal2 3 Weight of paper usual 2 to 3 Heavy1 Weight of paper heavy 1 Coated Kind of paper Coated paper Timing Setting of the separation timing Display Description Setting range Initial setting 1st side Correction value of single side p...

Page 168: ...ng a figure which is used as a reference when correcting the high voltage based on time Purpose To check the drum status Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The drum drive time is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Drum count value for cyan M Drum count value for magenta Y Drum cou...

Page 169: ...um counter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the color to reference The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three cases Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Cyan drum number M Magenta drum number Y Yellow drum number K Black drum number Display Description C ...

Page 170: ...belt unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the transfer belt unit counter Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the transfer counter Method 1 Press the start key The history of a machine number and a transfer belt unit counter for each color is displayed by three cases Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is...

Page 171: ...he screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U135 Checking toner motor operation Description Drives toner motors Purpose To check the operation of toner motors Remarks When driving the toner motors long time or several times developer section becomes the toner full and is locked Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Toner 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop the opera...

Page 172: ...s 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine Description Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine Purpose To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine Method 1 Press the start key The detected temperature are d...

Page 173: ...ue of developer On timing Off Timing Setting the value of developer Off timing Image Preference Toner density setting Display Description Initial setting C Setting the value of cyan 480 180 36 37 1500 M Setting the value of magenta 480 180 36 37 1500 Y Setting the value of yellow 450 150 36 37 1500 K Setting the value of black 450 150 36 37 1500 Remove C Setting the value of remove cyan 50 150 36 ...

Page 174: ...ow 0 Normal 1 Deep Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting C Setting the value of cyan 500 to 500 0 0 M Setting the value of magenta 500 to 500 0 0 Y Setting the value of yellowt 500 to 500 0 0 K Setting the value of black 500 to 500 0 0 Display Description Setting range Initial ...

Page 175: ... in a great volume mode must be changed If the charged toner stays inside the developer unit density decreases Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 1 Even if it changes the preset value of T7 operation does not change 2 At the preset value 60 they are toner supplies spaced at 600 seconds 4 Press the start key The settin...

Page 176: ...plays the state of the toner sensor Waste Box Displays the state of the waste toner box Display Switches and sensors T C Sensor C Displays the state of the toner sensor Cyan T C Sensor M Displays the state of the toner sensor Magenta T C Sensor Y Displays the state of the toner sensor Yellow T C Sensor K Displays the state of the toner sensor Black Motor Drives developer motor developer clutch Las...

Page 177: ...ecking a figure which is used as a reference when cor recting the toner control Purpose To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit Method 1 Press the start key The developer drive time of each color is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Switches and sensors Waste Box Sensor Displa...

Page 178: ...us Method 1 Press the start key The current developer counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Developer count value for cyan M Developer count value for magenta Y Developer count value for yellow K Developer count value for black ...

Page 179: ...re of overtem perature rise 100 to 250 240 Return Edge Return temperature of overtempera ture rise 100 to 250 190 Ready Edge Ready display temperature 0 to 200 110 Pressure Press Pressurizing beginning temperature 0 to 200 100 High speed Center Full speed shift temperature 0 to 200 125 Ready Center Ready display temperature 100 to 200 150 Drive Center The second stability temperature 100 to 200 15...

Page 180: ...and settings the reference voltage of the fuser IH PWB Purpose To check the reference voltage Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode 1 100 V specifications 2 200 V specifications 3 120 V specifications 4 110 V specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Descript...

Page 181: ...scription Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light 4 Press the stop key The LEDs turns off Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Fix...

Page 182: ...e or Check Figure 1 3 17 Method Initialize 1 Press the start key 2 Tap the center of the sign 3 Press the center of the key dis played next Press it using a tool with a fine tip Figure 1 3 18 Item No Description Display Description Initialize Execute the correction of the touch panel display position Check Confirm the display position of touch panel Maintenance Mode Maintenance Mode Active Initial...

Page 183: ...your fingers Not your fingernails Figure 1 3 20 5 Press the center of two signs dis played next at the same time Figure 1 3 21 Item No Description Press the center of the sign Press it using a tool with a fine tip Press both circles Finalize with both pressed at the same time Press wiit the tips of your fingers NOT your fingernails Press both circles Finalize with both pressed at the same time Pre...

Page 184: ... it using a tool with a fine tip If you cannot proceed to the next step press the Stop key and try again Press the center of the sign Press it using a tool with a fine tip If you cannot proceed to the next step press the Stop key and try again Press the center of the sign Press it using a tool with a fine tip If you cannot proceed to the next step press the Stop key and try again ...

Page 185: ...or less respectively If the setting values are not aligned select Initialize and press the Start key to revert to step 1 Figure 1 3 27 Item No Description Initialize completed Initialize Single Tap Check Press the center of the sign Press it using a tool with a fine tip If you need to perform initialization again select Initialize and press the Start key Initialize Multi Tap Check Single Tap Check...

Page 186: ...k completed is dis played the checking process is com pleted successfully Figure 1 3 30 Item No Description Multi Tap Check Step 1 Press both circles Finalize with both pressed at the same time Press with the tips of your fingers NOT your fingernails Step1 Not completed Step2 Not completed Initialize Multi Tap Check Step 2 Press both circles Finalize with both pressed at the same time Press with t...

Page 187: ...ey to revert to Multi tap check Figure 1 3 31 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Multi Tap Check Step 2 Press both circles again Select Multi Tap Check Step 1 and press the Start key to try again from Multi Tap Check Step 1 If you need to perform initialization again select Initialize and press the Start key Press the Stop ...

Page 188: ...t initiated 7 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Method Call Service End 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Communication with the host initiated 3 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Result table Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Init Set...

Page 189: ...scription Normal Speed Normal reading 600 dpi High Speed High speed reading Mode Sets the conveying timing verification mode Reset Resets the conveying timing verification data Result Resets the conveying timing verification data Display Description CCD ADP With paper single sided original of CCD CCD RADP With paper double sided original of CCD CIS With paper double sided original of CIS CCD ADP N...

Page 190: ...Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the Key Device or Coin Vender 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item...

Page 191: ... more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting No Coin Action 1 Select the item Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description On Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying Price Charg...

Page 192: ...ff and On Setting Print 1 Select the item 2 Select the paper size to be set Item No Description Display Description Normal Charge setting Normal AD Charge setting Commercial Print Charge setting Print Apl Charge setting Extended Display Description B W Black White CMY Single color C M Y RGB Single color R G B Full Color Full color Display Description Setting range Initial setting B W CMY RGB Full ...

Page 193: ...tion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting B W CMY RGB Full Color A3 Ledger A3 Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100 B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50 Card Post card 0 to 300 10 30 Other Other 0 to 300 10 50 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10 Apl2 Ex...

Page 194: ... the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U209 Set RTC Real Time Clock Date Description Assign a date and time to RTC Purpose Used to assign a date and time to RTC when Maintenance T is displaye...

Page 195: ...set 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U222 Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card Purpose To change the type of IC card Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Initial setting Other 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item ...

Page 196: ...operation from the system menu Partial Lock 1 Lock the operation 1 from the system menu Partial Lock 2 Lock the operation 2 from the system menu Partial Lock 3 Lock the operation 3 from the system menu Lock Lock the operation from the system menu and job cancel Item Partial Lock 1 Partial Lock 2 Partial Lock 3 Lock Entering maintenance mode Prohibited Prohibited Entering system menu Prohibited Pro...

Page 197: ... information Item No Description Display Description Install Installs the image data or the message data UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data Display Description Display area Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display...

Page 198: ... from sleeping The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U234 Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of punch unit of 1000 sheet finisher Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ...

Page 199: ...dle Tray 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non staple copying 10 sheets 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Middle Tray Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode De...

Page 200: ...F middle motor DFMM is turned on at high speed Middle L DF middle motor DFMM is turned on at low speed Eject H DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at high speed Eject L DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at low speed Save H DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at high speed Save L DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at low speed Tray DF tray motor DFTM is turned on Staple Move DF slide motor DFSLM is turned o...

Page 201: ...a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Punch Punch motor PUM is turned on Punch Move Punch slide motor PUSLM is turned on Display Description Sub Tray DF feedshift solenoid DFFSSOL is turned on Save Drum DF drum solenoid DFDRSOL is turned on Punch Punch solenoid PUSOL is turned on Display Description Conv MB drive motor MBDM is turned on at paper conveying Branc...

Page 202: ...nsor of the mailbox Punch Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit Display Description Front Cover DF front cover switch DFFCSW Top Cover DF top cover switch DFTCSW Tray U Limit DF tray sensor 1 DFTS1 Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3 DFTS3 Tray L Limit DF tray sensor 4 DFTS4 Tray Top DF tray upper surface sensor DFTUSS HP DF paper entry sensor DFPES Middle Tray Eject DF middle eject sensor DFM...

Page 203: ...isplay Description Eject MB eject sensor MBES Cover MB cover open close switch MBCOCSW Over Flow1 MB overflow sensor 1 MBOFS1 Over Flow2 MB overflow sensor 2 MBOFS2 Over Flow3 MB overflow sensor 3 MBOFS3 Over Flow4 MB overflow sensor 4 MBOFS4 Over Flow5 MB overflow sensor 5 MBOFS5 Over Flow6 MB overflow sensor 6 MBOFS6 Over Flow7 MB overflow sensor 7 MBOFS7 Motor HP MB paper entry sensor MBPES Dis...

Page 204: ...for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Item No Description Display Description Feed Motor 1 2 3 DP original feed motor DPOFM is turned on Conv Motor 1 2 DP original conveying motor DPOCM is turned on Rev Motor 1 3 DP switchback motor DPSBM is turned on Lift Motor 1 2 DP lift motor DPLM is turned on Rev Press Sol 1 DP pressure solenoid DPPSOL is turned on Rev Branch Sol 1 DP feedshift so...

Page 205: ...72 3 DP 773 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed 1 2 3 DP feed sensor DPFS Regist 1 3 DP registration sensor DPRS Timing 1 2 3 DP timing sensor DPTS CIS Head 2 DP CIS sensor DPCS Tray 1 3 DP switchback sensor DPSBS Set 1 2 3 DP original sensor DPOS Longitudinal 1 2 DP original length switch DPOLSW Lif...

Page 206: ...d 1 Press the start key 2 Change the message using the cursor up down keys When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the message corresponding the specified number is displayed 3 Change the language using the keys Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description ...

Page 207: ...djustment of front rear shift home position Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper Adjusting of front back stapling home position Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to set Method Finisher 1 Select the item to set Item No Description Display Description Finisher Adjustment of 1000 sheet fini...

Page 208: ... the keys or numeric keys If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A increase the setting value If the distance is larger than the value A decrease the setting value Figure 1 3 33 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing 5 to 5 0 1 m...

Page 209: ...es 7 Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position Setting Shift Front HP Shift Tail HP 1 Select Shift Front HP or Shift Tail HP 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select Motor then Sort Test 6 Repeat the ...

Page 210: ... When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine sample 2 decrease the setting value Figure 1 3 35 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position 5 to 5 0 1 mm S...

Page 211: ...selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description 2PF Paper feeder Display Description Motor Off PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned off On PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned on Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 PFPCCL1 is turned on C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 PFPCCL2 is turned on V Feed Clutch PF paper feed clutch PFPFCL is turned on H Feed...

Page 212: ...reen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed When the firmware is upgraded in the field the standard counter value newly added should be set to 300000 Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting M Cnt A Preset values for maintenance cycle kit A 0 to 9999999 200000 M Cnt B Preset values for maintenance cycle kit B 0 to 9999999 200000 M Cnt HT Preset values for aut...

Page 213: ... selecting a maintenance item No is displayed When the firmware is upgraded in the field input the counter value of U901 into the pri mary feed counter If the counter value is larger than 30000 replace the primary feed roller and input 0 Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting M Cnt A Count value for maintenance cycle kit A 0 to 9999999 0 M Cnt B Count value for maint...

Page 214: ... power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U252 Error codes Item No Description Display Description Inch Inch North America specifications Europe Metric Metric Europe specifications Asia Pacific Metric Asia Pacific specifications Australia Australia ...

Page 215: ... setting of U276 Setting the copy count mode is Mode1 3 Select the count system Initial setting DBL A3 Ledger 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Full Color Count system of full color mode Mono Color Count system of single color mode B W Count system of black white...

Page 216: ... the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds betw...

Page 217: ...ing the delivery date Description Enter delivery date in month day and year Purpose To operate when installing the machine Perform this to confirm the delivery date Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Today 3 Press the start key The delivery date is set Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The delivery date is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance ...

Page 218: ... Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description B W 2...

Page 219: ...d background or uneven density appears when printing pages with high print coverage Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Rank Setti...

Page 220: ...et Setting Black Line Cnt 1 Select Cnt 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Black Line Mode Black line cleani...

Page 221: ... setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting Level 1 2 1 Select the item 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Rate Size coefficient Mode Toggling full color count and color coverage count display Level...

Page 222: ... than 5 seconds between Off and On Supplement The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large Setting Adj Max Job 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys The maximum Printer jobs should be maximum jobs maximum copy jobs 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed...

Page 223: ...ion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 3 Press the start key The setting is set C...

Page 224: ...maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Cnt 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range...

Page 225: ...s the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Disable Auto Sleep Setting Auto Sleep setting Display Description On Transition to sleep mode is deactivated from the system menu Off Transition to sleep mode is activated fro...

Page 226: ...lue is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Lead Printer leading edge margin 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm A Margin Print...

Page 227: ...7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A Margin Scanner left margin 0 to 10 0 2 ...

Page 228: ...ing value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Figure 1 3 38 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description U402 P 1 3 129 U403 P 1 3 130 U404 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per ste...

Page 229: ...system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select Adj Data 6 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Figure 1 3 39 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is display...

Page 230: ...stment is made second time 7 Place the output test pattern 3 as the original Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 3 and set them 8 Press the start key Adjustment is made third time 9 When normally completed Finish is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Error codes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenan...

Page 231: ...t key 5 Select Table Chart1 6 Select the item Select All for normal use Item No Description Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N Table Chart1 Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec tion chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceUp Chart1 Do not use Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section first side chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceDown Chart1 Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section...

Page 232: ... enter the target value 1 Set a specified original P N 7505000005 on the DP face up 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select Target 4 Select Auto and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceUp Chart1 6 Select Input 7 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed OK is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed and operation ...

Page 233: ...he start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed OK is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin ning If the target values are not obtainable automatically manually enter the following target values in the followi...

Page 234: ...edure from the begin ning Method DP FaceUp Chart2 1 Set a specified original P N 302AC68243 on the DP Cut the trailing edge of the original Figure 1 3 40 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select Target 4 Select U425 and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceUp Chart2 6 Select INPUT Item No Description Display Description All Executing the all scanner adjustment Input Executing the adjustment for magni...

Page 235: ... Matrix 1 Select Matrix 2 Set a specified original P N 303JX57020 on the DP face down 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When ALL is selected the adjustment of Input MTF Gamma and Matrix can be executed at once When adjusting place the three specified originals on the DP face down and then press the start key Set the original 303JX57020 and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order o...

Page 236: ... Codes Item No Description Codes Description 01 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge skew 02 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction far end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction near end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge skew 04 Black band is not detected sca...

Page 237: ...ing direction center line error 15 DP main scanning direction skew error 16 Main scanning direction magnification error 17 Service call error 18 DP paper misfeed error 19 PWB replacement error 1a Original error 1b Input gamma adjustment original error 1c Matrix adjustment original error 1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error 1e Lab value searching error 1f Lab value com...

Page 238: ...tion Codes Description S001 Black band is not detected main scanning direction far end S002 Black band is not detected main scanning direction near end S003 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction leading edge S004 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew error 1 5 mm or more S006 Main scanning direction skew error...

Page 239: ...ion White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the magenta patch f...

Page 240: ...edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F 15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1 5 Enter the values using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys in Dist2 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D and E 1 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of...

Page 241: ...patch for the original for adjustment N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment G Setting ...

Page 242: ...inal at D E and F Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt b of the original at D 35 mm from the left edge E 110 mm from the left edge and F 185 mm from the left edge respec tively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D F 2 E 2 5 Enter the values solved using the keys or numeric keys in Main Scan 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure ...

Page 243: ...the original at B 4 Enter the measured value using the keys or numeric keys in Main Scan 5 Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge inside to the black belt of trailing edge inside of the original at C 6 Enter the measured value using the keys or numeric keys in Sub Scan 7 Press the start key The value is set Figure 1 3 43 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a ma...

Page 244: ...ginal is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Text Photo Density of each color in the text photo mode Photo Density of each color in the photo mode Photo Printout Density of each color in the printed photo mode Text Dens...

Page 245: ...be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Setting Permission 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Permission Setting of operation permission Time Interval Setting of driving time Mode Setting the color print execution mode Bias Target Setting of Bias ta...

Page 246: ...g time of the calibra tion between paper 0 to 100 20 Sleep Out Setting the execution time of sleeve return calibration 0 to 100 18 T C Calib Setting the execution time of T C cali bration 0 to 100 11 Permission A permission setup of a T C Calib temperature change On Off Off Display Description Short Color printing mode setup Short Normal Color printing mode setup Nomal Long Color printing mode set...

Page 247: ... 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Setting 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Regist Executes the calibration to correct registration Gamma Executes the calibration to quantities of light Pape...

Page 248: ...tion Display Description Auto C Display the auto color registration adjustment value for 1st color Auto M Display the auto color registration adjustment value for 2nd color Auto Y Display the auto color registration adjustment value for 3rd color Manual C Display the manual color registration adjustment value for 1st color Manual M Display the manual color registration adjustment value for 2nd col...

Page 249: ...hole Display Description LSU Out Top Image up to date timing LSU Out Left Image optical axis adjustment Magnification Whole Correction data of original size magnification in whole Magnification Part1 Correction data of original size magnification in a part 1 Magnification Part2 Correction data of original size magnification in a part 2 Magnification Part3 Correction data of original size magnifica...

Page 250: ... 1 Select Print 2 Press the start key A chart for adjustment is outputted 3 Set the output chart for adjustment as the original 4 Select Execute 5 Press the start key Color registration correction starts 6 When normally completed OK is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Figure 1 3 44 Item No Description Display Description Auto Executing the auto color reg...

Page 251: ...ter all values have been entered Color registration correction starts 7 Print a chart for adjustment 8 Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A Figure 1 3 46 Item No Description Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected S004 Original inclination error S002 Original deviation in the main scanning direction S005 Original type error SFFF Scanner other error S003 Original ...

Page 252: ...image quality but lower the image processing speed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Setting Copy 1 Select the item to be set 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Copy Compression ratio for copying Send Compression ratio for sending System Compressi...

Page 253: ...reduced file size priority Display Description Setting range Initial setting Y1 to Y5 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 CbCr1 to CbCr5 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Y3 to Y3 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 15 25 90 CbCr3 to CbCr3 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 15 25 ...

Page 254: ...each color Purpose Enter the exposure density correction data after replacing the laser scanner unit Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Descript...

Page 255: ...tection A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting PDF Rotation 1 Change the setting value using keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Mode Setting the image processing mode Color Table Setting the Color Table Display D...

Page 256: ...s to blue turn the power switch off and on Item No Description Display Description Color Table 1 Prn Setting the printer color table Default Color Table 2 Prn Setting the printer color table Custom Color Table 1 Copy Setting the copy color table Default Color Table 2 Copy Setting the copy color table Custom Install Install the printer color table Uninstall Prn Uninstall the printer color table Uni...

Page 257: ...e sure that the USB flash device that contains the color table files is inserted The color table files must be placed in the root of the USB flash device 1 Press the Execute button once it is activated 2 Press the Start key 3 Installation is completed when OK is displayed Setting Uninstall Prn Uninstall Copy 1 The color table currently being installed is displayed 2 Select the color table you want...

Page 258: ...ntinuous printing is minimum Color monochrome mode is switched for every original Mode2 A mode suited for the user with high black and white usage in which the occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is maximum Printing in color mode resumes up to 10 pages in a row even an interrupt is made to switch to black and white mode until printing is diverted to black and white mode from co...

Page 259: ...2NP 1 3 162 U486 Details on the modes Figure 1 3 47 Item No Description ...

Page 260: ...ination code OEM code is no operation necessary 3 Select Execute 4 Press the start key Data initialization starts To cancel data initialization press the stop key 5 After data initialization ROM version are displayed A ROM version displays three kinds application boot and IPL Destination code list Item No Description Code Destination Code Destination 000 Japan 253 CTR21 European nations 009 Austra...

Page 261: ... Execute 4 Press the start key Data initialization starts To cancel data initialization press the back key 5 After data initialization ROM version are displayed A ROM version displays three kinds application boot and IPL U603 Setting user data 1 Description Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax Purpose To be executed as required Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Line T...

Page 262: ... any ringing 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U605 Clearing data Description Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history Purpose To clear the transmission history Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select CLEAR COM REC 3 Press the start key Initialization processing starts ...

Page 263: ...y when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode If the number of excess lines is below the setting those lines are ignored If over the setting the entire data on a page is fur ther reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over reduced and too much trailing edge mar...

Page 264: ...educed so that it can be recorded on the same page 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenan...

Page 265: ...et 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Adj Lines Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Adj Lines A4 Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper i...

Page 266: ...t Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Auto Reduct Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be per formed Protocol List Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list Display Description On Auto reduction is performed if the r...

Page 267: ...s displayed U620 Setting the remote switching mode Description Sets the signal detection method for remote switching Be sure to change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the machine Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Remort Mode 3 Select the mode Initial setting One 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a mainte...

Page 268: ...Setting Interval 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting Times 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Interval Setting the auto redialing interval Times Settin...

Page 269: ...d of using the DIS or NSF signal When the destination unit has V 34 capability V 34 is selected regardless of the setting 1 Select the setting Initial setting 14400bps 2 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed RX Speed Sets the reception speed TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender...

Page 270: ...fter a CED signal is received Used when problems occur due to echoes at the receiver 1 Select the setting Initial setting 75 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description 500 Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS 300 Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS Display Descri...

Page 271: ...to the IP Internet Protocol telephone line 1 Select the setting Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting CED Freq Sets the frequency of the CED signal Used as one of the measures to improve transmission per formance for international communications 1 Select the setting Initial setting 2100 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen ...

Page 272: ...on times in the fax telephone auto select mode 1 Select the setting Initial setting 2Time 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes Num OF CNG F T Sets the CNG detection times in the fax telephone auto select mode Display Descript...

Page 273: ...used 1 Select the setting Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description V 34 Enables or disables V 34 communication V 34 3429Hz Sets the V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception RTN Check Sets the reference for RTN signal output Display Description On V 34 communication is enabled for both transmission...

Page 274: ...maintenance item No is displayed U634 Setting communication control 5 Description Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal Used as a measure to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select TCF Check 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Pre...

Page 275: ... the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting Time Cont 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Time One Sets the one shot detection time for remote switching Time Cont Sets ...

Page 276: ...ic keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting T1 Time Out Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception No change is necessary for this maintenance item 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description T0 Time Out Sets the T0 time out time T1 Time Out Sets the T1 time out time T2 Tim...

Page 277: ...ils to receive a call 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Figure 1 3 48 Ta Tb1 Tb2 time out time Setting Tb1 Time Out In the fax telephone auto select mode sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine see figure 1 3 48 In fax telephone auto select mode change the setting when fax reception is unsucc...

Page 278: ...l or a telephone fails to receive a call 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting Td Time Out Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status fax one of the triggers for Tc time check In the TAD mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call Be sure not to set it too short o...

Page 279: ... setting 0dB 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting Reg G3 RX Eqr 1 Select 0dB 4dB 8dB or 12dB Initial setting 0dB 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting RX Mdm Level 1 Select 33dBm 38dBm 43dBm or 48dBm using the cursor up down keys Initial setting 43dBm 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is disp...

Page 280: ...ress the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Sgl LV Modem Modem output level 15 to 0 DTMF LEV CENT DTMF output level main value 15 to 0 DTMF LEV DIFF DTMF output...

Page 281: ...tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public switched telephone network 1 Select the setting Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description Exchange Sets the connection to PBX PSTN Dial Tone Sets PSTN dial tone detection Busy Tone Sets busy tone detection PBX Setting Setting for a PBX DC Loop Sets t...

Page 282: ...de to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX According to the type of the PBX connected select the mode to connect an outside call 1 Select the setting Initial setting Loop 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting DC Loop Sets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing 1 Select the setting Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press ...

Page 283: ...escription Setting List Outputs a list of software switches self telephone number confidential boxes ROM versions and other information Action List Outputs a list of error history transmission line details and other information Self Sts Report Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode own status report regarding fax transmission only Protocol List Outputs a list of transmission procedures Err...

Page 284: ...backup data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item 3 Press the start key Backup data is cleared 4 When Recovery FAX DIMM or FAX DIMM Clear is selected turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Reservation Clear Clears the...

Page 285: ...g 1 Select the item to be set Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description FAX Bulk TX fax batch transmission On Off A5 Pt Priority Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception Display Description On Fax batch transmission is ena...

Page 286: ...wn only when the optional dual FAX has been installed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Press PORT SELECT The current setting is displayed in reverse 3 Select the item to be set Initial setting ALL 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Supplement The setting must be made after re entering maintenance mode be...

Page 287: ...bit between 0 and 1 5 Press the start key to set the value Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed Communication control procedure Item No Description No Bit Item 36 7654 Coding format in transmission 3210 Coding format in reception 37 5 33600 bps V34 4 31200 bps V34 3 28800 bps V34 2 26...

Page 288: ...ection pattern 122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern 1 Busy tone detection in automatic FAX TEL switching 125 76543210 Access code registration for connection to PSTN 126 7654 FAX TEL automatic switching ring back tone ON OFF cycle No Bit Item 133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time 134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time 141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle minimum 142 76543210 Ringer detection cycl...

Page 289: ...aper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not dis played Clearing 1 Select the counts to be cleared Cassette3 and Cassette4 cannot be cleared 2 Select the counts for all and press Clear 3 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description MPT MP tray Ca...

Page 290: ...ed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for jam code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of jam code by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared Completion Press ...

Page 291: ...ayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for service call code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call count cann...

Page 292: ... performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sec tions and the related parts are serviced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press Execute 3 Press the start key to reset partial operation control 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description DP Counts of document processor DF Counts of document finisher Display Desc...

Page 293: ... displayed U910 Clearing the print coverage data Description Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time as shown on the service status report Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key The print coverage data is cleared Completion Press the stop ke...

Page 294: ...ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display metric Description Display inch Description A3 Paper feed counts for A3 Ledger Paper feed counts for Ledger B4 Paper feed counts for B4 Legal Paper feed counts for Legal A4 Paper feed counts for A4 Letter Paper feed counts for Letter B5 Paper feed counts for B5 Statement Paper feed counts for State ment A5 P...

Page 295: ... written in Item No Description Display Description Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory Display Description Depending data Address Book Address book Job Account Job accounting One Touch Information on one touch key Address Book User User managements Job Account Document Box Document box information Job Account User Shortcut Shor...

Page 296: ...1 User managements open error e015 Address book open error group e322 User managements list error e016 Address book list error group e324 Shortcut open error e017 Address book list error group e325 Shortcut list error e110 Job accounting clear error e410 Box file open error e111 Job accounting open error e411 Box error in writing e112 Job accounting open error e412 Box error in reading e113 Job ac...

Page 297: ...USB unmount error e716 Fax memory error d008 File rename error e717 Fax memory error d009 File open error e718 Fax memory mode error d00a File close error e910 File reading error d00b File reading error e911 File writing error d00c File writing error e912 Data mismatch d00d File copy error e913 Log file open error d00e File compressed error e914 Log file error in writing d00f File decompressed err...

Page 298: ...y H Count value of full color copy coverage high Color Copy M Count value of full color copy coverage middle Color Copy L Count value of full color copy coverage low Mono Color Copy Count value of single color copy B W Copy Count value of black white copy Color Prn H Count value of full color print coverage high Color Prn M Count value of full color print coverage middle Color Prn L Count value of...

Page 299: ...3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method 1 Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen f...

Page 300: ...ort 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key Exports a maintenance log to a USB flash device Execute is grayed out is a USB memory is not installed Displays a OK or NG after execution Setting Setting 1 Select the item Select the key that includes the number you want to configure as the logs are displayed block by block U000 U019 U020 U029 U900 U999 2 Enable or disable the numbe...

Page 301: ...ng value using the keys or numeric keys l 1 Reversed DP only The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflection If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item ...

Page 302: ...ce Nbr into a workflow 4 Press the start key The setting is set 5 Press the start key Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession Item No Description Display Description Continue Restarting an abandoned workflow Execute USB Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device Execute Executes a workflow stored in the machine Entry USB Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device ...

Page 303: ...n power switch on 4 Enter maintenance item U952 5 Select Entry USB 6 Select the workflow 7 Select the work flow save area 8 Select Execute Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine Example Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text mainte nance ID editable is inserted File Format xxx mwf 1 SET UP 464 469 410 000 927 278 2 WARRANTY 089 00...

Page 304: ...roblem occurs during auto correction error code is displayed Setting Jam Log 1 Select Jam Log 2 Select On or Off 3 Press the start key The setting is set Supplement Instructions on how to obtain a log when the operation panel has frozen Simultaneously press and hold the 8 6 and Clear keys for 3 to 6 seconds to start logging The memory indicator keeps lighting during a log is generated and goes off...

Page 305: ...r verifying the main power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch 2 Insert USB memory in USB memory slot 3 Turn the main power switch on 4 Enter maintenance item U977 5 Select Execute 6 Press the start key 7 Send the print data to the machine Once the print data is stored into USB memory Finish will be displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance ...

Page 306: ...r Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the color to check 3 The history of a machine number and a developer counter for each color is displayed by three cases Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Cyan developer unit number M Magenta developer unit number Y Yellow developer unit number K Black developer ...

Page 307: ...result is displayed 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U991 Checking the scanner operation count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method 1 Press the start key The current operation counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance No item is dis...

Page 308: ...on panel To remove paper misfed in the machine pull out the cassette open the paper conveying unit or paper conveying cover The positions and the corrective actions are displayed on the touch panel when a paper jam has occurred Figure 1 4 1 JAM Paper jam 02 04 1 Open right cover 1 and remove the paper 2 Open the fuser cover a and remove the paper 3 Remove any paper from the paper ejection 4 Close ...

Page 309: ...e 3 or 4 option D Misfeed in the MP tray E Misfeed in the duplex unit F Misfeed in the inner tray or fuser section G Misfeed in the document processor option H Misfeed in the job separator I Misfeed in the the bridge option J Misfeed in the the document finisher option A D G H I J J J J J B C C B E F C C ...

Page 310: ...DFMES DFPES PFPS2 PFPS1 PFFS2 PFFS1 PFPCS2 FS EPS PCS BRCS2 BRCS3 BRCS1 FUPS DUCL MCL PFCL RS RCL DUS FS2 PFFS ES DPOS DPPFS DPPFS DPRCL MPSOL FS1 1000 sheets Document finisher 500 sheets 2 Paper feeder 3000 sheets Bulk paper feeder Document processor DPRS DPTS DPSBS ...

Page 311: ... the duplex section 0121 Exceeding number of duplex pages circulated The controller issued the duplex section a request for more pages than the duplex print cycle con tains E 0210 Right cover 3 open The right cover 3 is opened during printing 0501 No paper feed from cassette 1 The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 1 A 0502 No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed s...

Page 312: ... 4 Bulk paper feeder C 1403 Feed sensor 1 non arrival jam Feed sensor 1 FS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 B 1404 Feed sensor 1 FS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 B 1413 Feed sensor 1 stay jam Feed sensor 1 FS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 B 1414 Feed sensor 1 FS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 B 1604 Feed sensor 2...

Page 313: ... does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 1 F 4102 The fuser pre sensor FUPS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 2 F 4103 The fuser pre sensor FUPS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 3 F 4104 The fuser pre sensor FUPS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 4 F 4108 The fuser pre sensor FUPS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from duplex section F 4...

Page 314: ...from cassette 2 H 4213 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 H 4214 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 H 4218 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section H 4219 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from the MP tray H 4301 Duplex sensor non arrival jam The duplex sensor DUS ...

Page 315: ... conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 H 4908 The bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section H 4909 The bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray H 4911 Bridge conveying sensor 1 stay jam The bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 ...

Page 316: ...r 3 BRCS3 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 I 5018 The bridge conveying sensor 3 BRCS3 does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section I 5019 The bridge conveying sensor 3 BRCS3 does not turn off during paper feed from the MP tray I 6001 DF paper entry error DF paper entry sensor DFPES turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine 1000 sheet finisher 6021 DF...

Page 317: ... J 7001 DF staple operation error DF staple sensor DFSTS is not turned on within specified time after driving the DF staple motor DFSTM 1000 sheet finisher J 7100 CF paper entry sensor non arrival jam CF paper entry sensor CFPES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received J 7901 HP detection error of a mid dle motor DF middle sensor DFMES is no...

Page 318: ...er feed sensor DPPFS or DP regis tration sensor DPRS does not turn off within the specified time of the DP timing sensor DPTS turning on G 9200 DP registration sensor non arrival jam The DP registration sensor DPRS does not turn on within the specified time of the DP paper feed sensor DPPFS turning on G 9210 DP registration sensor stay jam DP registration sensor DPRS does not turn off within speci...

Page 319: ...00 DP eject sensor non arrival jam DP eject sensor DPES does not turn on within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS turning on G 9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor DPES does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS turning off G Code Contents Conditions Jam location Refer to figure 1 4 1 for paper jam location see page 1 4 1 ...

Page 320: ...AX control PWB incompat ible detection error In the initial communication with the FAX control PWB the normal communication com mand is not transmitted Defective FAX soft ware 1 Install the FAX system designed for the model 2 Reinstall the fax software Defective PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation 0100 Backup memory device error Defective flash memory 1 Turn the main po...

Page 321: ...ower swtch off and after 5 seconds then turn power on 2 Check that the EEPROM is peroperly installed on the engine PWB and re install it Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 39 Defective EEPROM Check the EEPROM and if the data are cur rupted contact the service support 0160 Backup memory data error engine PWB Defective flash memory 1 Turn the main powe...

Page 322: ... after 5 seconds then turn power on 2 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary con nect the connector all the way in Operation PWB YC10 and Main PWB YC12 3 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring Main PWB Replace the main PWB see page 1 5 37 0620 FAX image DIMM error DIMM is not installed cor rectly DIMM cannot be accessed DIMM installed i...

Page 323: ...iring that connects the DP main PWB and the main PWB 3 Replace the DP main PWB 4 Replace the main PWB see page 1 5 37 0640 Hard disk error The hard disk cannot be accessed Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1 If an abnormal noise is heard from the HDD replace the HDD 2 Check the SATA wiring between the HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose connection disconnection and da...

Page 324: ...D 2 Check the SATA wiring between the HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose connection disconnection and damages and that it is connected into the correct terminal Main PWB YC1 YC27 3 Replace the SATA cable 4 Execute U024 to initialize FULL the HDD see page 1 3 33 5 If an error is detected after executing U024 replace the HDD Main PWB Replace the main PWB see page 1 5 37 0670 Hard disk overwritin...

Page 325: ...the back up battery 4 If communication error due to a noise etc is present with the RTC on the main circuit PWB check the PWB is properly grounded Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 37 0870 FAX control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer error High capacity data transfer between the FAX control PWB and the main PWB of the machine was not normal...

Page 326: ...m plate can move smoothly and repair any problem that is found Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity of the connector cable If necessary replace the cable Lift motor 1 and engine connect PWB YC6 Engine connect PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC4 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the lift motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly ...

Page 327: ...fective PWB Replace the engine connect PWB or the main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 1030 PF lift motor 1 error paper feeder After cassette 3 is inserted PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 15 s This error is detected five times succes sively Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any...

Page 328: ...s 2 seconds at the second time and later During driving the motor the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 1s or more 5 times succes sively However the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection Paper feeder lift base elevating mechanism Check that the cassette base can be manipulated smoothly if not repair or replace PF Lift motor1 1 Check that t...

Page 329: ...ted or grounded replace the wiring 5 Replace the PF Lift motor2 PF Lift sensor2 1 Check that the sensor is correctly positioned 2 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in PF Lift sensor 2 and PF main PWB 3 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 4 Replace the PF Lift sensor 2 PF main PWB Replace the PF ...

Page 330: ...e the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if necessary Defective motor Replace the Developer motor K Defective PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 2102 Developer motor YCM steady state error The rated speed signal detected the stability OFF continuously for 1 s after the de...

Page 331: ...rade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 2112 Developer motor YCM startup error Developer motor YCM is not stabilized within 3 s since the motor is activated Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If neces sary replace the cable Develope...

Page 332: ...2 Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 2202 Drum motor YCM steady state error The rated speed signal detected the stability OFFcontinuously for 1 s after the drum motor YCM stabilizes Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum motor YCM and...

Page 333: ...um motor YCM and engine PWB YC3 Defective drive transmission sys tem 1 To check the motor operation execute Drum YCM by U030 see page 1 3 34 2 Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective motor Replace the Drum motor YCM Defective PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Repla...

Page 334: ... none replace the cable Conveying motor 2 and video PWB YC28 Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective motor Replace the Conveying motor 2 Defective PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the video PWB and check for correct ope...

Page 335: ...eck for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Conveying motor 1 and engine PWB YC25 Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective motor Replace the conveying motor 1 Defective PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary...

Page 336: ...efer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder 2700 TC belt release motor error When the TC belt release motor is driven error signal is detected continuously for 3 s Defective drive transmission sys tem 1 To check the motor operation execute U30 CMY Release see page 1 3 34 2 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Intermediate ...

Page 337: ...k that the sensor is correctly positioned 2 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Home position sensor and ISC PWB YC8 3 Replace the home position sensor Defective PWB Replace the ISC PWB or the main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 37 3210 CIS lamp error When input value at the time of CIS illumination does not ...

Page 338: ... Optical system AGC error After AGC correct input is not obtained at CCD Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1 To check the lamp execute U061 CCD see page 1 3 43 2 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB YC6 CCD PWB YC2 and ISC PWB YC9 ISC PWB YC3 and Main PWB YC11 3 If the wiring ...

Page 339: ... the connector cable If none replace the cable CCD PWB and ISC PWB YC9 ISC PWB and main PWB YC11 Defective CCD PWB Replace the image scanner unit see page 1 5 21 Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 37 3600 Scanner sequence error Defective main PWB or engine PWB Replace the main PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 37 or 1 5...

Page 340: ... engine PWB or LSU connect PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 4003 Polygon motor M steady state error The rated speed signal detected the stability OFF continuously for 1 s after the polygon motor M stabilizes Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser sca...

Page 341: ...engine PWB or LSU connect PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 4013 Polygon motor M startup error Polygon motor M is not sta bilized within 10 s since the motor is activated Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit M and LSU connect PWB YC6 LS...

Page 342: ...so check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable BDPWB and APCPWB APCPWB and LSU connect PWB YC3 LSU connect PWB and engine PWB YC13 Defective APCPWB Replace the Laser scanner unit C see page 1 5 20 Defective BDPWB Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB or LSU connect PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 4103 BD initialization problem M BD is not detected ...

Page 343: ... the FCC wiring all the way in Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB YC1 LSU relay PWB YC10 and Engine PWB YC13 2 If the FCC wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the FCC wiring 3 Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 20 Engine PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 42 4202 BD steady state error C The BD signal...

Page 344: ...the FCC wiring is disconnected replace the FCC wiring 3 Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 20 Engine PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 42 4600 LSU cleaning motor error When the LSU cleaning motor is driven an error signal is detected continuously for 2 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector ...

Page 345: ...a temperature higher than 240 C 464 F continuously for 1 s Deformed connec tor pin If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Shorted fuser thermistor Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation s...

Page 346: ...r 1 s Deformed connec tor pin If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Defective fuser thermistor Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 Defective PWB Replace the IH PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 57 1 5 39 6130 Fuser therm...

Page 347: ...eck for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable IH coil unit and IHPWB IHPWB and engine PWB YC30 Deformed connec tor pin If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Fuser thermostat triggered Reinsert the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 Broke...

Page 348: ... the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Defective fuser thermistor Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 Defective fuser heater Defective PWB Replace the IH PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 57 1 5 39 6410 Fuser unit type mism...

Page 349: ...see page 1 5 57 Defective cooling fan motor Replace the IH fan motor 6750 Abnormally output overcur rent IHPWB Defective PWB Replace the IH PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 57 Defective fuser unit Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 6760 Abnormally AC input over current IHPWB Defective PWB Replace the IH PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 57 6770 Abnormally low ele...

Page 350: ...nd engine PWB YC19 Defective cooling fan motor Replace the container IH coil fan motor or the IH fan motor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 39 6950 IH CPU communication error A communication error is detected 3 times in succes sion Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within ...

Page 351: ...nds 23 or less or 248 or more Defective Devel oper unit Replace the developer unit M see page 1 5 13 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 7104 Toner sensor Y error The sensor outputs are for 5 seconds 23 or less or 248 or more Defective Devel oper unit Replace the developer unit Y see page 1 5 13 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB check for correct ope...

Page 352: ...nnec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit Y and drum connect PWB YC6 Drum connect PWB and engine PWB YC4 Different type of the developer unit is installed Install the correct developer unit see page 1 5 13 7411 Drum unit K type mismatch problem Absence of the drum unit K is ...

Page 353: ...11 ID sensor K density error When the concentration in a bias calibration is unusual Defective ID sen sor Replace the ID sensor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 7612 ID sensor C density error When the concentration in a bias calibration is unusual Defective ID sen sor Replace the ID sensor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB check for correct operat...

Page 354: ...curs eight times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs eight times successively Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit K and drum connect PWB YC5 drum connect PWB and engine connect PWB YC8 Engine connect PWB and engine PWB YC4 Defective drum PWB Replace t...

Page 355: ...ight times successively Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit Y and drum connect PWB YC2 drum connect PWB and engine connect PWB YC8 Engine connect PWB and engine PWB YC4 Defective drum PWB Replace the drum unit Y see 1 5 15 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB check for correct oper...

Page 356: ...urs eight times successively Poor contact in the connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit M and drum connect PWB YC8 drum connect PWB and engine connect PWB YC8 Engine connect PWB and engine PWB YC4 Defective devel oper PWB Replace the developer unit M see 1 5 13 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB c...

Page 357: ...replace the wiring 6 Replace the punch motor Punch home position sensor 1 Execute U241 Punch Punch HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch home position sensor and Punch PWB YC8 4 Replace the Punch hom...

Page 358: ...rm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch motor and Punch PWB YC4 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the punch motor Punch PWB 1 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch PWB YC1 and DF main PWB YC8 2 Replace the pu...

Page 359: ...onfirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch motor and Punch PWB YC4 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the punch motor Punch PWB 1 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch PWB YC1 and DF main PWB YC8 2 Replace th...

Page 360: ...or and DF main PWB YC11 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF paddle motor DF paddle sensor 1 Execute U241 Finisher Bundle Eject HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting board are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all t...

Page 361: ...ctor all the way in DF bundle discharge unit sensor and DF main PWB YC20 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF eject release motor DF bundle discharge unit sensor 1 Execute Finisher Bundle Eject HP of U241 finisher switch check see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting board are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connect...

Page 362: ...is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF tray motor DF tray sensor 1 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 Execute U241 Finisher Tray U Limit Tray Top to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the wa...

Page 363: ... If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF tray motor DF tray sensor 1 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 Execute U241 Finisher Tray U Limit Tray Top to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the conne...

Page 364: ... way in DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC14 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF tray motor DF tray sensor 4 1 Execute U241 Finisher Tray Middle to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the ...

Page 365: ...way in DF side registration motor 1 and DF main PWB YC11 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration sensor 1 1 Execute U241 Finisher Width Front to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firm...

Page 366: ...DF main PWB YC11 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration sensor 1 1 Execute U241 Finisher Width Front to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect th...

Page 367: ... the way in DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB YC11 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration sensor 2 1 Execute U241 Finisher Width tail HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector ...

Page 368: ...DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB YC11 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration sensor 2 1 Execute U241 Finisher Width tail HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly co...

Page 369: ...WB YC10 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the DF slide motor DF staple sensor 1 Execute U241 Finisher Width Staple HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in DF st...

Page 370: ...in PWB Replace the DF main PWB Refer to the service manual for the document finisher 8240 DF staple motor error 2 Staple JAM DF has been detected twice in a row The second JAM detection condition fullfilled with a lock detection signal maintained 1 V for 500 ms continuously while the stapler motor was driven DF staple motor 1 Remove the staple unit and check that stapling is possible without a jam...

Page 371: ...ected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 5 Replace the DF middle motor DF middle sensor 1 Execute U241 Finisher Middle Tray Eject to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in DF middle sensor and DF main PWB YC2...

Page 372: ... 5 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the punch slide motor Punch slide sensor 1 Execute U241 Punch Punch HP to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 103 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch slide senso...

Page 373: ...sconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 6 Replace the punch slide motor Punch paper edge sensor 1 2 1 Execute U241 Punch Edge Face 1 2 3 4 to check the finisher switch see page 1 3 105 2 Check that the sensor and its mounting bracket are correctly positioned 3 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in Punch paper edge sens...

Page 374: ...kup error Read and write data does not match 3 times in succession DF main PWB 1 Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in DF main PWB YC7 and Engine PWB YC33 2 If the wiring is disconnected shorted or grounded replace the wiring 3 Replace the DF main PWB 8990 Backup memory data prob lem document finisher When one of the existence o...

Page 375: ...n the DP lift motor is driven DP lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 1500 pulse Three recovery times The above has been detected 5 times The number of detec tion should be weighted with one for the rise at job start and two for the irregular rise during transpot ing The accumulated number must be cleared at completion of a normal rise The default threshold is 5 DP lift motor 1 Execute U906 Separ...

Page 376: ...g connector is firmly connected and if necessary connect the connector all the way in DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB YC2 4 Replace the DP lift sensor2 DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB 9060 DP EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 3 times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 3 times successively DP main PWB 1 Execute U906 Separating Opera...

Page 377: ... coin mec 9110 Coin vender error Communication error has been detected in connection with the coin mec and the rejector Rejector installed incorrectly Check the rejector is properly installed and if not perform the corrective action Defective rejector Replace the rejector 9120 Sensor error in coin vender change Yen 10 Change is empty despite change is enough Coin jam in the change tube Check visua...

Page 378: ... error Coin is paid out despite the pay out motor is determined not active Defective pay out motor Replace the coin mec 9170 Coin vender pay out sensor error Coin is paid out despite the pay out motor is determined not active Change jam at the pay out Check visually and remedy Defective pay out motor Replace the coin mec Defective pay out sensor 9500 ISC PWB error A Main PWB ISC PWB 1 Reinsert the...

Page 379: ...r the developing unit Do not replace the drum unit with the one color for other one in the same machine F000 Communication error between main PWB and operation PWB Main PWB 1 Turn the main power swtch off and after 5 seconds then turn power on 2 Check that the wirings and connetors between the main circuit PWB and the operation circuit PWB and between the main circuit PWB and the HDD are normal Ma...

Page 380: ...B YC3 and the engine PWB YC46 is normal and if necessary re insert Or replace the FCC wire 4 If not corrected replace the main PWB see page 1 5 37 Engine PWB 1 Check the engine software and upgrade to the latest if necessary 2 Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 42 HDD Replace the HDD F041 Communication error between Main PWB and Scanner engine Main PWB 1 Turn the main power swtch off and after 5 ...

Page 381: ... ROM checksum error Scanner software Install the latest scanner software ISC PWB 1 Turn the main power swtch off and after 5 seconds then turn power on 2 Confirm that the EEPROM has been properly installed 3 If not corrected Replace the ISC PWB Code Contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures ...

Page 382: ...rinted horizon tally 8 One side of the print image is darker than the other 9 Spots are printed 10 Image is blurred See page 1 4 78 See page 1 4 78 See page 1 4 78 See page 1 4 79 See page 1 4 79 11 The leading edge of the image is con sistently mis aligned with the original 12 The leading edge of the image is spo radically mis aligned with the original 13 Paper is wrin kled 14 Offset occurs 15 Pa...

Page 383: ...t the connector Also check for conti nuity of the connector cable If necessary replace the cable High voltage PWB and engine PWB YC6 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 39 No LSU laser is out put Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 20 Defective engin PWB Replace the eng...

Page 384: ...tive measures Defective main charger out put Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB and engine PWB YC6 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 39 Deteriorated toner Perfo...

Page 385: ...belt Replace the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 16 Defective transfer roller Replace the transfer roller unit see page 1 5 16 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 15 Dirty developer section Clean any part contaminated wit...

Page 386: ...xample Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it Deformed press roller Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 17 Paper conveying section drive problem Check the gears and belts and if necessary grease them Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted leading e...

Page 387: ... Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Replace the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 15 Dirty transfer belt Clean the transfer belt Replace the intermidate transfer unit if it is extremely dir...

Page 388: ...1 5 21 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted image center line Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 3 37 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 47 Original is not placed cor rectly Place...

Page 389: ... source PWB see page 1 5 44 2 ISU motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable ISU motor and ISC PWB YC5 ISC PWB and main PWB YC11 2 Defective drive trans mission system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check ...

Page 390: ...ne PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 6 Controller fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Controller fan motor and main PWB YC23 2 Defective motor Replace the controller fan motor 3 Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for ...

Page 391: ...H fan motor 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 12 Fuser fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser fan motor and engine PWB YC23 2 Defective motor Replace the Fuser fan motor 3 Defective PWB Rep...

Page 392: ... mid clutch 1 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 18 Mid clutch 2 does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Mid clutch 2 and engine PWB YC28 2 Defective clutch Replace the mid clutch 2 3 Defective PWB Replace t...

Page 393: ...Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 24 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette 1 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Paper sensor 1 2 and engine connect PWB YC7 Engine connect PWB to engi...

Page 394: ...and check for correct operation see page 1 5 39 28 The size of paper on the cassette 2 is not displayed cor rectly 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Paper size width switch 2 and engine PWB YC27 Paper size length switch 2 and engine PWB YC27 engine PWB and main PWB 2 De...

Page 395: ... Paper width guide in the cassette are installed incorrectly Check the paper width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary 4 Multiple sheets of paper are fed Check if the paper is excessively curled Change the paper Paper is loaded incorrectly Load the paper correctly Check if the retard roller is worn Replace the retard roller if it is worn see page 1 5 8 5 Paper jams Check if the paper...

Page 396: ...hared 1103 Destined host folder and or file names are invalid 1 Check illegal characters are not contained within these names 2 Check the name of the folder and files conform with the naming syntax 3 Confirm destined host and folder 1105 SMB protocol is not enabled 1 Confirm device s SMB protocols 2101 Login to the host has failed 1 Confirm the destined host 2 Confirm that the LAN cable is properl...

Page 397: ...rt number 4 Confirm device s network parameters 5 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 6 Check the FTP server name 2102 Access to the FTP server has failed Connection timeout 1 Check the FTP server name 2 Check the FTP port number 3 Confirm device s network parameters 4 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 5 Check the FTP server name 2103 The server cannot est...

Page 398: ...ice s network parameters 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 3101 FTP server responded with an error 1 Confirm device s network parameters 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 3 Check the FTP server Code Contents Check procedures corrective measures ...

Page 399: ...SMTP POP3 server 2102 Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Connection timeout 1 Check the SMTP POP3 server name 2 Check the SMTP POP3 port number 3 Confirm device s network parameters 4 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 5 Check the SMTP POP3 server 2103 The server cannot establish communi cation 1 Check the SMTP POP3 server name 2 Check the SMTP POP3 port number 3 Co...

Page 400: ...ervices including CRAM MD5 DIGEST MD5 PLAIN and LOGIN 4803 Failed to establish the SSL session 1 Verify the self certificate of the device 2 Check the server certificate of the SMTP POP3 server 3 Check the SMTP POP3 configuration of the device and the SMTP POP3 server Code Contents Check procedures corrective measures ...

Page 401: ...rors start with an E indica tion followed by five digits The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause while the lower two indicate the detailed classification Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits Figure 1 4 4 Error code U X X X X X Detailed classification of error code General classification of erro...

Page 402: ...in V 34 mode See page 1 4 103 U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during reception in V 34 mode See page 1 4 104 U02000 Relay broadcast was refused by a relay station because of a mismatch in permit ID num ber and permit telephone number when a relay command was issued U02100 A relay command failed because the destination unit relay station had no relay broad cast c...

Page 403: ...confidential transmission was not registered in the des tination unit Or in interoffice subaddress based transmission mode the specified sub address box number was not registered in the destination unit Or the destination was being accessed U04100 Confidential transmission failed because the destination unit had no confidential capabil ity Or subaddress based transmission failed because the destin...

Page 404: ...ption memory overflowed U14100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during confidential transmission Or in interof fice subaddress based transmission memory overflowed in the destination unit U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission U19200 Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred U19300 Transmissi...

Page 405: ...ess confidential box U00434 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confi dential box No was intended for encryption U00435 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confi dential box was being accessed Or subaddress based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because the specified subaddress c...

Page 406: ...ng paper U00615 Empty of recording paper U00620 Copier fixing unit problem U00622 Copier drive motor problem U00655 CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error U00656 Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error U00670 Power was cut off during communication U00677 There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode U00690 System error Error code Descript...

Page 407: ...o relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded U01018 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI EOP signal and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded betwee...

Page 408: ...Q signal ECM U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal ECM U01053 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS NULL signal ECM U01054 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS MPS signal ECM U01055 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS EOM signal ECM U01056 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS EOP signal ECM U01057 A D...

Page 409: ...r transmission of a PIP signal U01124 No response after transmission of a PIN signal U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal between units of our make U01126 No response after transmission of a PPR signal ECM U01127 No response after transmission of an ERR signal ECM U01128 No response after transmission of an RNR signal ECM U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal shor...

Page 410: ...M U01154 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal ECM U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal short protocol U01160 During message reception transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line U01161 Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception U01162 A break in loop current was detected during message reception U011...

Page 411: ...cation speed and symbol speed occurs after MPh exchange a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut 2 9 U023XX error code table Relay command abnormal reception 2 10 U044XX error code table Encrypted transmission Error code Description U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 line probing U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 primary channel equival...

Page 412: ...r be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the cables caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum unit Note the following when handling or storing the drum unit When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum unit at an ambient temperature between 20 C...

Page 413: ...black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera branded toner container otherwise it is a counterfeit Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Figure 1 5 2 Validation viewer Validation viewer Brand protecti...

Page 414: ...ng the front cover Procedures 1 Remove the cassette See page 1 5 8 2 Open the front cover 3 Remove two films from the front cover Figure 1 5 3 4 Unhitch the straps by squeezing the hooks inward as shown Figure 1 5 4 Film Film FIlm Hooks Strap Hooks Strap ...

Page 415: ...aching and refitting the rear cover Procedures 1 Remove eight screws 2 Pull the rear cover upwards and then release three hooks 3 Remove the rear cover Figure 1 5 6 Front cover Fulcrum axis Fulcrum axis Fulcrum section Fulcrum section Screw Screw Screw Screw Screws Screw Screw Rear cover Hooks Hook ...

Page 416: ...autious of the posi tion of a paper guide Figure 1 5 7 2 Remove the rear cover See page 1 5 4 3 Remove the cassette See page 1 5 8 4 Open the front cover 5 Remove six screws 6 Pull the left lower cover upwards and then release four hooks 7 Remove the left lower cover Figure 1 5 8 Job separator tray Lock lever Paper guide Hooks Screw Screw Screw Left lower cover Screw Screw Screw ...

Page 417: ...2NP 1 5 6 8 Release the hook of the front upper cover 9 Tilt the front upper cover forward Figure 1 5 9 10 Remove the inner tray Figure 1 5 10 Hook Front upper cover Inner tray ...

Page 418: ...es 1 Remove the screw and remove the eject rear cover Figure 1 5 11 2 Release two hooks by using a flat screwdriver 3 Release two projections and remove the tray left cover Figure 1 5 12 Screw Eject rear cover Tray left cover Hooks Flatscrew driver Projections Hooks ...

Page 419: ...e paper feed lever and then remove the primary paper feed unit 3 Check or replace the primary paper feed unit and refit all the removed parts 4 When replacing the new unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations see page 1 3 192 Figure 1 5 14 Cassette Primary paper feed unit Paper feed lever ...

Page 420: ...fitting the MP paper feed roller and MP separation pad Procedures 1 Open the right cover 1 Figure 1 5 15 2 While squeezing the holder inward remove the MP paper feed roller Figure 1 5 16 Right cover 1 MP paper feed roller Holders ...

Page 421: ... 4 Check or replace the MP paper feed roller and MP separation pad and refit all the removed parts 5 When replacing the new parts proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations see page 1 3 192 Figure 1 5 17 MP separation pad ...

Page 422: ...right 6 Check or replace the registration roller right and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 18 4 Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner Procedures 1 Open the front cover 2 Open the duct cover See page 1 5 14 3 Set the cleaner lever up and draw the registration cleaner frontward 4 Check or replace the registration cleaner and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 19 Right cover 1 R...

Page 423: ...n remove the connector 3 Close the right cover 1 Figure 1 5 20 4 Open the MP tray 5 Release two fulcrums of the MP tray by using a flat screwdriver 6 Pull two straps upwards to remove 7 Remove the MP tray Figure 1 5 21 Right cover 1 Connector MP wire cover Flatscrew driver Flatscrew driver Fulcrum MP tray Straps Fulcrum ...

Page 424: ... developing unit Procedures 1 Open the front cover 2 Release the lock lever and then remove the waste toner box Figure 1 5 22 3 Turn the lock lever to the right and then knock down the duct cover forwards Figure 1 5 23 Lock lever Waste toner box Lock lever Duct cover ...

Page 425: ... unit upwards and then remove the developer unit 6 Check or replace the developer unit and refit all the removed parts 7 When replacing the new unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 133 Figure 1 5 25 Duct holder Lever f Lock lever Developer unit ...

Page 426: ...nd then remove the drum unit 6 Check or replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts 7 When replacing the new unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 133 Figure 1 5 26 2 Detaching and refitting the chager roller unit Procedures 1 Remove the drum unit See page 1 5 15 2 Release two lock levers and then remove the chager roll...

Page 427: ...e 1 3 133 Figure 1 5 28 2 Detaching and refitting the secondary transfer roller unit Procedures 1 Open the right cover 1 2 Release two lock levers and then remove the secondary transfer roller unit 3 Check or replace the secondary trans fer roller unit and refit all the removed parts 4 When replacing the new unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U127 Clearing the transfer count see p...

Page 428: ...ure 1 5 30 3 Grip two knobs of the fuser unit 4 Lift the fuser unit upwards and then remove the fuser unit 5 Check or replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts 6 When replacing the new unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 133 Figure 1 5 31 Fuser unit Mount levers Right cover 1 Fuser unit Knobs ...

Page 429: ...ce the drive unit 1 and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 32 NOTE When refitting the drive unit 1 checks that the position of a cam is in the A side from the upper limit line NOTE When cam isn t in the A side from the upper limit line turn the motor by hand and bring the cam into the A side Figure 1 5 33 Screw Screw Screw Drive unit 1 Screw Hooks Drive unit 1 Connector A Cam Motor Upper limit...

Page 430: ...hing and refitting the drive unit 3 Procedures 1 Remove the rear cover See page 1 5 4 2 Remove two connectors 3 Remove two wire holders and then release the wires 4 Remove four screws 5 Release the hook and remove the drive unit 3 6 Check or replace the drive unit 3 and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 35 Screw Screw Drive unit 2 Screw Screw Connectors Connectors Connector Drive unit 2 Screw...

Page 431: ...c discharging belt around your wrist to prevent damage to the LSU Do not touch termi nals and FFC contacts in the APC PWB of the LSU When reconnecting FFCs be sure to insert the FFC all the way in with the FFC connector This is to avoid a lengthy servicing due to a possible error which could cause re disassembly and assembly 11 When replacing the new LSU proceed as follows 1 When replacing the LSU...

Page 432: ...h of A and B in the outputted test pattern 7 When measuring the size of two places A and B if the difference of sizes is 1 5 mm or less it is the completion of adjustment If the difference of size is more than 1 5mm proceed to step 8 Figure 1 5 39 8 Loosen two screws 9 Adjust a scale for reference using an adjustment knob In the measured value A B move the adjustment knob to rightward In the measu...

Page 433: ...stration begins Figure 1 5 40 Manual correction 5 Press Manual and then Print Chart A chart is printed 6 Press Registration Read figures at MH 1 to 7 CH 1 to 7 YH 1 to 7 and MV 3 CV 3 YV 3 of the reference chart and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M C Y fine lines using the keys 7 Press Start after all values have been entered Color registration begi...

Page 434: ...2 4 5 coincide within the range of 1 to A If they are within the range adjustment is complete If they are out of range proceed to step 11 Figure 1 5 43 If manual color registration has failed 11 If the balance between V 1 and V 5 is more than 2 scales sample 1 or less than 2 scales sample 2 perform the following steps Figure 1 5 44 The scale must be corresponding within the range of A from 1 Chart...

Page 435: ... 5 2 scales sample 2 rotate clockwise Number of rotation V 1 V 5 x 4 clicks 15 Refit the waste toner box tray as before and then close the front cover 16 Turn the main power switch off and on Correction automatically starts 17 Print a reference chart and verify the result Caution After the adjustment for the abgle of the mirror has been made run the maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 1...

Page 436: ...res 1 Remove two screws and then remove the scanner right cover ATTENTION To reinstall the scanner right cover position it close to the contact glass Figure 1 5 46 2 Remove the contact glass by pull right ward Figure 1 5 47 Screw Scanner right cover Screw Contact glass ...

Page 437: ...ove the scanner cover Figure 1 5 48 4 Remove the FFC and the connector 5 Remove four screws and then remove the image scanner unit Figure 1 5 49 Screw Screw Screw Screw Scanner cover Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Image scanner unit FFC Connector ...

Page 438: ... Confirm the number marked a and then match the line c of ISU to the positioning line b of same number on frame side Line c is the one which is marked with the appropriate number The rear and front of machine Match the edge e of ISU to the posi tioning line d on frame side 7 Fix the ISU as before with four screws 8 Check or replace the image scanner unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 ...

Page 439: ...ght cover and contact glass See page 1 5 21 2 Remove two screws and then remove the scanner rear cover 3 Remove the rear cover Figure 1 5 51 4 Remove two screws and remove the scanner front upper cover Figure 1 5 52 Screw Scanner rear cover Screw Screw Scanner front upper cover Screw ...

Page 440: ... Release the hook and then remove the FFC cover Figure 1 5 53 8 Remove the FFC from the connector 9 Remove two screws and then remove the LED unit 10 Check or replace the LED unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 54 FFC cover Exposure unit Hook Sheet Screw Screw LED unit FFC ...

Page 441: ...an exposure unit Caution When you move an exposure unit manually carry out after removing the connec tor of a scanner motor An ISC PWB may be damaged with the back electromotive force of a scanner motor Figure 1 5 55 Connector Scanner motor Exposure unit ...

Page 442: ...wires Procedures 1 Remove the scanner unit see 1 5 45 2 Remove the two screws 3 Remove the scanner left cover and the contact glass assy Figure 1 5 56 4 Move the exposure unit to the cutout portion 5 Peel off the sheet 6 Release the hook and then remove the FFC cover Figure 1 5 57 Screw Screw Scanner left cover Contactglass assy FFC cover Exposure unit Hook Sheet ...

Page 443: ...and then remove the LED unit Figure 1 5 58 9 Remove each screw and remove the front and rear wire holder plates 10 Remove the mirror frame 1 from the scanner unit Figure 1 5 59 Screw Screw LED unit FFC Screw Screw Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate Mirror frame 1 ...

Page 444: ...2NP 6 1 5 33 11 Remove the scanner wire springs from the hooks 12 Remove the scanner wires Figure 1 5 60 Scanner wire springs Hooks Scanner wire black Scanner wire gray Round terminals black marking ...

Page 445: ...e following tools Two frame securing tools P N 302FZ17100 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 35968110 Procedures 1 Remove the screw and remove the scanner wire drum gear 2 Remove the stop ring and bush from the front of the scanner wire drum shaft 3 Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit Figure 1 5 61 Stop ring Screw Scanner wire drum gear Bush Scanner wire drum shaft Scanner unit ...

Page 446: ... wires outward 5 Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers Figure 1 5 62 6 Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit 7 Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to fix the mirror frame 2 in position Figure 1 5 63 Three turns inward Four turns outward Scanner wire stoppers Scanner wire drums Locating ball Loca...

Page 447: ... wire stoppers and the two frame securing tools 15 Move to center the portion of the locat ing ball in the scanner wire drum and the scanner wires to inside 16 Move the mirror frame 2 from side to side in order to correctly locate the wires in position 17 Refit the mirror frame 1 18 Move the mirror frame 1 and 2 to the left side of the machine and insert the two frame securing tools into the posit...

Page 448: ...hook and then remove the connector from the DP relay PWB 3 Remove the screw and remove the DP connector mounting plate Figure 1 5 66 4 Remove eight screws and remove the controller box cover Figure 1 5 67 Screw Guide Hook DP connector mounting plate Wire saddle DP relay PWB Connector Screw Screw Screws Screws Screw Screw Screws Screw Controller box cover ...

Page 449: ...d FFC from the main PWB 8 Remove the wire guide and the controller fan motor 9 Remove nine screws and then remove the main PWB 10 Check or replace the main PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 69 Guide hooks Wire saddles Edging Wires Screw Wire guide Controller fan motor Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Main PWB ...

Page 450: ...or the Main MMI Browser and Dictionary Jpn excluding Language were copied into the slot on the machine and turn power on see page 1 6 1 2 After the main circuit PWB has been replaced perform U026 to restore backed up data Do not replace the main circuit PWB and the HDD at the same time Otherwise the settings retained by U026 in the HDD will not become restorable Referring to the U000 maintenance r...

Page 451: ...EEPROM on the main PWB has been replaced 1 Run U004 model number entry The C0130 mismatching model number is displayed when the device is powered up after its EEPROM has been replaced Restore the counter values and serial number that are stored in the engine EEPROM 2 Referring to the maintenance report that was printed using U000 at setup set the following maintenance modes 1 U252 Setting the dest...

Page 452: ...ecting to any connector is satisfactory Figure 1 5 73 Detaching of EEPROM 1 The flat screwdriver is inserted between EEPROM and socket 2 Detach it little by little right and left and alternately while noting the transformation and the damage of the pin Figure 1 5 74 Main PWB BK WH WH YC21 YC22 YC26 Flatscrew driver EEPROM Soket ...

Page 453: ...e connector from the ISC PWB 3 Remove the wires by releasing three wire saddles Figure 1 5 75 4 Remove six screws 5 Pull the left lower cover upwards and release four hooks 6 Remove the left lower cover Figure 1 5 76 ISC PWB Wire saddles Wires Connector Hooks Screw Screw Screw Left lower cover Screw Screw Screw ...

Page 454: ...ngine PWB 11 Remove four screws and then remove the engin PWB 12 Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts CAUTION When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U15 from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB Figure 1 5 78 Screws Screws Controller box FFC FFC clamp Screw Screw Wires Screw Screw Engine PWB Wire saddles A Wire saddle B...

Page 455: ...and then reattach it to the new PWB Figure 1 5 79 Detaching of EEPROM 1 The flat screwdriver is inserted between EEPROM and socket 2 Detach it little by little right and left and alternately while noting the transformation and the damage of the pin Figure 1 5 80 EEPROM YS1 Engine PWB Flatscrew driver EEPROM Soket ...

Page 456: ...he inner tray See page1 5 5 2 Remove the eject rear cover See page1 5 7 3 Release two hooks and then remove the tray left cover Figure 1 5 81 4 Remove the left upper cover by sliding it backward Figure 1 5 82 Tray left cover Hooks Flatscrew driver Projections Hooks Left upper cover ...

Page 457: ...ee page1 5 17 6 Remove two screws and scanner right cover 7 Remove the right upper cover Figure 1 5 83 8 Remove two screws and scanner rear cover Figure 1 5 84 Right upper cover Screw Scanner right cover Screw Screw Scanner rear cover Screw ...

Page 458: ... Remove two screws and scanner front upper cover Figure 1 5 85 10 Remove the staple holder 11 Remove the screw and the staple cover Figure 1 5 86 Screw Scanner front upper cover Screw Screw Staple holder Staple cover ...

Page 459: ...lock part and then remove the upper cover B by sliding it to the left Figure 1 5 87 13 Remove two screws and then remove the operation panel lower cover Figure 1 5 88 Upper cover B Lock part Screw Screw Operation panel lower cover ...

Page 460: ...NP 5 1 5 49 14 Remove four screws from the operation panel upper unit Figure 1 5 89 15 Remove the ISU front cover Figure 1 5 90 Screws Screw Operation panel upper unit Screw Screws Screws ISU front cover ...

Page 461: ...ws and the mount board of DP relay PWB 18 Remove three connectors from the ISC PWB Figure 1 5 91 19 Remove four screws and then remove the image scanner unit upward Figure 1 5 92 Screw Screw Mount board of DP relay PWB Wire saddle ISC PWB Connector Connector Connector Connector Screw Screw Screw Screw Image scanner unit ...

Page 462: ...eject unit 21 Slide the eject unit to the right Figure 1 5 93 22 Remove six screws 23 Release four hooks by sliding the high voltage PWB upward Figure 1 5 94 Screw Screw Eject unit High voltage PWB Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Hooks Hooks ...

Page 463: ...5 52 24 Remove two connectors from the high voltage PWB 25 Remove the high voltage PWB 26 Check or replace the high voltage PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 95 High voltage PWB Connector Connector ...

Page 464: ...e 1 5 96 3 Remove all connecters from the power source PWB 4 Remove eight screws and then remove the power source PWB 5 Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 97 Power source box cover Screw Screw Screw Screws Screws YC3 YC1 YC11 YC10 YC14 YC4 YC5 TB1 TB2 TB3 PWB connector Power source PWB Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw ...

Page 465: ...he right cover1 3 Remove the front upper cover 4 Remove two screws and then remove the operation panel lower cover Figure 1 5 98 5 Remove four screws and then rotate the operation panel upper unit Figure 1 5 99 Screw Screw Operation panel lower cover Screws Screw Operation panel upper unit Screw Screws Screws ...

Page 466: ...pper unit Figure 1 5 100 8 Remove three connectors from the operatioon panel PWB main 9 Remove a screw and then remove the wire guide from the operation panel upper unit Figure 1 5 101 Operation panel upper unit Connectors Operation panel PWB main Screw Connectors Wire guide Operation panel upper unit ...

Page 467: ...on panel PWB main 11 Remove six screws and remove the operation panel PWB main 12 Check or replace the operation panel PWB main and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 102 Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Operation panel PWB main Operation papnel upper unit ...

Page 468: ...er Figure 1 5 103 5 Remove the connector from the option connect PWB 6 Remove two screws and remove the IH box cover 7 Remove all connectors from the IH PWB 8 Remove six screws and then remove the IH PWB 9 Check or replace the IH PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 104 Right rear cover Right upper cover Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw IH box cover IH PWB Connector Option...

Page 469: ...vers A and B to remove them Figure 1 5 105 2 Remove the clear panel Figure 1 5 106 3 Remove the operation panel sheet 4 Replace the operation panel sheet of the corresponding language 5 Refit the clear panel 6 Refit the operation panel covers A and B Figure 1 5 107 Operation panel cover A Operation panel cover B Clear panel Operation panel sheet ...

Page 470: ...g and refitting the conveying unit Procedures 1 Remove the MP tray See page 1 5 12 2 Open the right cover 1 Figure 1 5 108 3 Remove two screws and then remove two straps Figure 1 5 109 Right cover 1 Screw Screw Strap Strap ...

Page 471: ...60 4 Rotate the wire cover 5 Remove two connectors 6 Rotate the fulcrum axis and slide it for ward 7 Pull the right cover 1 backward and then remove it Figure 1 5 110 Fulcrum Connectors Right cover1 Wire cover ...

Page 472: ...el inside Developer fan 2 Rating label outside Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Intake Developer fan 3 Rating label outside Fuser fan 2 Rating label outside Developer fan 1 Rating label outside Intake Container IH coil fan Rating label inside Inteke Intake IH fan Rating label box side Exhaust Intake Image fan Rating label outside Controller fan Rating label inside Power source fan Rating label lowe...

Page 473: ...2NP 1 5 62 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 474: ... 7 Confirm that the version of the firmware is correctly displayed 8 Turn OFF the main power switch and remove the USB memory Figure 1 6 1 Caution Never turn off the power switch or remove the USB flash device during upgrading Safe UPDATE If the device is accidentally switched off or the USB memory is disconnected and upgrading is incomplete per form the following If the power is accidentally swit...

Page 475: ...ch on 4 Rewriting of the PWB software will start for restoration The memory and attention LEDs will be blinking 5 Only the Memory LED will be blinking when rewriting is successful Only the Attention LED will be blinking when rewriting is failed 6 Turn the main power switch off 7 Wait for several seconds and then remove the USB memory from the USB memory slot 8 Extract the firmware to download from...

Page 476: ...e cassette can contain 500 sheets The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the pickup roller and sent to the paper conveying section by rotation of the paper feed roller Also the retard roller prevents mul tiple feeding of paper Figure 2 1 1 Cassette paper feed section 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 6 10 8 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 6 10 8 11 12 13 1 Pickup roller 2 Paper feed roller 3 Feed holder 4 Retard roll...

Page 477: ...LSW1 PWSW1 PAPER_LSIZE1_1 YC7 4 YC4 16 YC4 15 YC4 14 YC4 13 YC4 12 YC4 11 YC4 10 LIFT_FULL1_SW PAPEMP1 PAPEMP2 PAPER_LSIZE1_3 PAPER_LSIZE1_2 PAPER_LSIZEI_1 PAPER_WSIZE1 EPWB ECPWB EPWB LM2 PFCL2 LIFT_MOT2_OUTA LIFT_FULL2 _SW PAPEMP3 PAPER_WSIZE2 FEED2_MOT_CLK YC28 7 FEED2_MOT_RDY YC28 6 FEED2_MOT_DIR YC28 5 FEED2_MOT_REM YC28 8 6 5 4 3 YC26 3 YC27 5 CM2 PS3 FEED2_SW YC26 9 FS2 FEED_SW YC24 12 FS1 ...

Page 478: ... 1 4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 5 1 3 4 2 6 7 8 1 MP paper feed roller 2 MP separation pad 3 MP bottom plate 4 Actuator MP paper feed sensor 5 MP multi purpose tray 6 MP tray extension 7 MP paper width guide 8 Actuator MP paper length switch MPPS MPSOL MPF_PAPER_SET YC24 9 YC25 2 YC25 13 YC25 12 YC25 11 MPF_SOL_REM YC25 14 FEED1_MOT_DIR FEED1_MOT_RDY FEED1_MOT_CLK FEED1_MOT_REM 5 6 4...

Page 479: ...ransfer separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller Figure 2 1 5 Conveying section Figure 2 1 6 Paper conveying section block diagram 4 1 2 5 3 6 1 Left registration roller 2 Right registration roller 3 Left feed roller 4 Right feed roller 5 Actuator registration sensor 6 Registration cleaner ECPWB EPWB RCL RES_CL_REM YC25 5 MCL1 MID_CL_REM YC25 7 FEED1_MOT_DIR...

Page 480: ...ansfer is complete toner remaining on the drum surface is chipped off with the cleaning blade and is collected to the waste toner box with the sweep roller The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Figure 2 1 7 Drum section 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 1 Drum 2 Charger roller 3 Charger cleaning roller 4 Charger case 5 Cleaning blade 6 Sweep roller 7 Drum...

Page 481: ...L C CL M CL K Main charge Y Main charge C Main charge M Main charge K Drum unit Y Drum unit C Drum unit M Drum unit K ERASER_REM ERASER_REM ERASER_REM ERASER_REM ECPWB YC2 38 YC2 33 ERASER_REM COL ERASER_REM K YC8 9 YC8 4 ERASER_REM_COL ERASER_REM_K EPWB YC4 38 YC4 33 YC16 9 YC16 10 YC16 11 YC16 12 DRMCDIR DRMCRDY DRMCCLK DRMCREM DRMKDIR DRMKRDY DRMKCLK DRMKREM YC16 15 YC16 16 YC16 17 YC16 18 6 5 ...

Page 482: ...vel oping blade and the developing screws that agitate the toner Also the toner sensor TS checks whether or not toner remains in the developing unit Figure 2 1 9 Developer section 1 3 4 7 5 2 6 8 1 Sleeve roller 2 Magnet roller 3 Developing screw A 4 Developing screw B 5 Developing blade 6 Developer case 7 Developer base 8 Toner sennsor TS ...

Page 483: ... 7 YC8 8 YC1 11 YC1 9 YC1 8 YC1 7 YC1 6 YC9 2 YC8 2 YC7 2 YC6 2 TS Y DEVPWB Y DEVPWB C DEVPWB M DEVPWB K TCSENSE Y TCSENSE C TCSENSE M TCSENSE K DLP_TH TCSENSE Y TCSENSE C TCSENSE M TCSENSE K YC9 1 DLP_TH TCSENSE DLP_TH TS C TCSENSE TS M TCSENSE TS K TCSENSE YC16 1 YC16 2 YC16 3 YC16 4 6 5 4 3 YC16 8 YC17 1 YC17 2 YC17 3 YC17 4 6 5 4 3 DLPCDIR DLPCRDY DLPCCLK DLPCREM CLDLPREM DLPKDIR DLPKRDY DLPKC...

Page 484: ...d the image scanner unit stops at the position of the DP contact glass and scans sequentially one row of the image on the original in synchronization with the moving timing of the origi nal in the sub scan direction by driving the DP Figure 2 1 11 Scanner unit Figure 2 1 12 Image scanner unit ISU 3 2 1 4 5 6 1 Contact glass 2 Original size indicator plate 3 DP contact glass 4 ISU frame 5 ISU motor...

Page 485: ...ensor ISCPWB MPWB CCDPWB YC9 35 CCD_SEL CCDCLK2 CCDCLK1 POW PWM VSET YC9 4 YC9 2 YC6 9 YC6 8 YC6 5 EL ISUM HPS Scanner unit Lens Mirrer Image scanner unit ISU Original Contact glass YC8 3 YC4 YC25 LEDPWB YC5 1 SMOT_AP SMOT_BP SMOT_AN SMOT_BN HP_SW YC5 2 YC5 3 YC5 4 ...

Page 486: ... lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit adjust the diameter of the laser beam and focalize it at the drum surface Also the LSU cleaning motor LSUCM is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the LSU dust shield glass Figure 2 1 14 Laser scanner unit LSU 1 2 7 8 3 5 4 9 6 3 3 3 1 Polygon motor PM 2 Porygon mirrer 3 fθ lens A 4 fθ lens B 5 Mirrer A 6 Mirrer B 7 Mirrer C 8 LSU ...

Page 487: ...3 2 1 APCPWB BD PWB PM 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 YC8 3 YC8 4 YC8 5 YC7 3 YC7 4 YC7 5 YC6 3 YC6 4 YC6 5 YC5 3 YC5 4 YC5 5 APCPWB BD PWB PM 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 VDP Y VDN Y VCONT SH Y EN Y LSU_TH Y BD Y YC4 10 YC14 YC9 YC4 9 YC4 8 YC4 7 YC4 5 YC4 3 YC4 2 YC3 10 YC3 9 YC3 8 YC3 7 YC3 5 YC3 3 YC3 2 YC2 10 YC2 9 YC2 8 YC2 7 YC2 5 YC2 3 YC2 2 YC1 10 YC1 9 YC1 8 YC1 7 YC1 5 YC1 3 YC1 2 VDP C VDN C...

Page 488: ...or toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt Also with the ID sensors IDS mounted on the machine frame the toner density on the transfer belt is measured The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it as waste toner to the waste toner box Figure 2 1 16 Inter mediate transfer unit section 1 7 9 10 2 3 12 4 5 6 8 11 1 T...

Page 489: ...C7 2 YC14 1 YC14 2 YC14 3 YC2 8 YC2 7 YC2 6 YC14 7 YC2 2 YC1 3 YC1 5 YC1 8 YC1 7 YC4 1 1 YC4 2 2 YC4 4 4 YC4 6 1 YC4 7 2 YC4 9 4 YC2 YC4 BLT_MOT_OUTA BLTHP1 BLT_MOT_OUTB BELT_S1 BELT_S2 YC2 1 YC2 2 YC2 5 YC2 8 BLTHP2 YC1 4 YC1 6 YC1 7 YC1 8 ID1S ID1P LEDREF1 ID2S ID2P LEDREF2 IDS1 IDS2 1 TCBS1 1 TCBS2 1 2 TCBRM BLTREMA BLTREMB Cleaning bias Inter mediate transfer unit Primary transfer bias Y Prima...

Page 490: ... difference Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation charging that is output from the high voltage PWB HVPWB to the separation electrode Figure 2 1 18 Secondary transfer roller section Figure 2 1 19 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram 2 5 4 1 3 1 Secondary transfer roller 2 Separation needle holder 3 Paper chute guide 4 Separation needle 5 Fuser pre sensor...

Page 491: ...or1 FTH1 fuser thermistor2 FTH2 and the surface temperature of press roller is detected by the fuser thermistor3 FTH3 and controlled by the engine PWB EPWB If the fuser sec tion shows extremely high temperature the power line will be shut off and the IH coil IHC is forced to turn off Figure 2 1 20 Fuser section 10 12 13 3 5 11 7 8 2 6 4 9 1 1 Heat roller 2 Press roller 3 Uniformity heat roller 4 I...

Page 492: ...2 YC30 1 PRESS_MOT_OUTB PRESS_MOT_OUTA YC30 5 FSR_SW YC30 11 PR_TH YC30 10 HR_NCTH2 YC30 9 YC31 2 YC32 4 YC8 2 YC4 3 HR_NCTH1 EG_TH YC30 15 YC5 7 YC5 8 YC5 9 YC5 3 YC4 1 YC3 3 YC3 2 YC3 YC6 1 YC6 2 YC2 2 FUSERCLK FUSERREM 6 5 4 3 FUM FPRM FTH2 FTH1 FTH3 FTS PSPWB EPWB IHPWB FUPWB IHC YC30 17 YC5 1 RDS YC1 YC3 ...

Page 493: ...as passed the fuser section to the inner tray the job separator tray or the duplex conveying section Figure 2 1 22 Eject Feedshift section 8 6 7 4 3 2 5 1 1 Eject roller A 2 Eject pulley A 3 Eject roller B 4 Eject pulley B 5 Feedshift guide 6 Actuator paper full sensor 7 Actuator job paper full sensor 8 Actuator job eject paper sensor ...

Page 494: ...23 Eject Feed shift section block diagram EPWB EJE_FULL_DOWN EJE_FULL_UP EJE_MOT_B YC21 5 EJE_MOT_A YC20 6 3 2 1 EJE_MOT_ B YC21 3 YC21 1 1 EJE_MOT_ A EJE_SOL_REM YC21 4 4 YC21 12 YC21 9 EM PFS JPFS JS_LED YC21 14 JEPS FSSOL ...

Page 495: ... section to the paper feed conveying section when duplex printing Figure 2 1 24 Duplex conveying section 10 8 9 5 4 1 7 6 3 2 1 Right cover 1 2 Duplex feed roller A 3 Duplex feed pulley A 4 Duplex feed roller B 5 Duplex feed pulley B 6 Duplex feed roller C 7 Duplex feed pulley C 8 Duplex feed roller D 9 Duplex feed pulley D 10 Actuater duplex sensor ...

Page 496: ...2NP 2 1 21 Figure 2 1 25 Duplex conveying section block diagram EPWB DU_SW DU_CL_REM YC25 3 YC24 3 DUCL DUS ...

Page 497: ...2NP 2 1 22 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 498: ... 2 1 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PWBs Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 19 20 21 22 15 16 17 18 27 28 7 10 6 8 9 23 12 13 13 12 24 14 12 13 13 25 12 5 26 29 30 4 1 2 3 11 31 Front Inside Rear ...

Page 499: ...tions a EEPROM 16 Drum PWB C DRPWB C Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit for cyan Stores the drum s identifications a EEPROM 17 Drum PWB M DRPWB M Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit for magenta Stores the drum s identifications a EEPROM 18 Drum PWB K DRPWB K Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit for black Stores the drum s identif...

Page 500: ...RTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 2 Engine PWB EPWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 3 High voltage PWB HVPWB PARTS HVU1 SP 4 High voltage PWB sub HVPWB S PARTS HVU2 SP 5 Power source PWB PSPWB PARTS LVU MAIN 200 SP 6 Operation panel PWB main OPPWB M PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 7 Operation panel PWB sub OPPWB S 8 LCD LCD PARTS LCD COLOR SP 9 Touch panel TP 10 ISC PWB ISCPWB PARTS PWB ISC ASSY SP 11 LED PWB LEDPWB 12 ...

Page 501: ...ECT ASSY SP 26 Option connect PWB OPCPWB 27 IH PWB IHPWB PARTS PWB IH 200 ASSY SP 28 Fuser PWB FUPWB 29 Transfer PWB TCPWB 30 Transfer connect PWB TCCPWB PARTS PWB TRANSFER CONNECT ASSY SP 31 DP connect PWB No Name used in service manual Name used in parts list ...

Page 502: ... Detects the opening and closing of the right cover 2 7 Feed sensor 1 FS1 Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section 8 Feed sensor 2 FS2 Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section 9 MP paper sensor MPPS Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray 10 MP sub tray detection switch MPTDSW Detects the position of the MP sub tray 11 MP paper width switch MPPWSW Detects the...

Page 503: ...e position of the iD shutter 30 ID sensor 1 IDS1 Measurement of density of toner at calibration 31 ID sensor 2 IDS2 Measurement of density of toner at calibration 32 Main power switch MSW Turns ON OFF the AC power source 33 Bridge detection switch BRDSW Detects the presence of the bridge 34 Job eject papersensor JEPS Detects the presence of paper in the job separator 35 Temperature sensor TEMS Det...

Page 504: ...ves the drum unit CMY 8 Developer motor K DEVM K Drives the developer unit K Drives the transfer belt 9 Developer motor CMY DEVM CMY Drives the developer unit CMY 10 Conveying motor 1 CM1 Drives the paper feed section and conveying section 11 Conveying motor 2 CM2 Drives the paper feed section and conveying section 12 Toner motor Y TM Y Replenishes toner to the developer unit Y 13 Toner motor C TM...

Page 505: ...belt release 23 ID shutter motor IDSM Drives the ID sensor cleaning section 24 LSU cleaning motor LSUCM Drives the LSU cleaning section 25 Container IH coil fan motor C IHCFM Cools the containers and the IH coil 26 Developer fan motor 1 DEVFM1 Cools the developer section 27 Developer fan motor 2 DEVFM2 Cools the developer section 28 Developer fan motor 3 DEVFM3 Cools the developer section 29 LSU f...

Page 506: ...eveloper stop clutch DEVSCL Controls the drive of the developer 8 MP solenoid MPSOL Controls the MP bottom plate 9 Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Operates the feedshift guide 10 Cleaning lamp Y CL Y Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum 11 Cleaning lamp C CL C Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum 12 Cleaning lamp M CL M Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge ...

Page 507: ...on panel PWB OPPWB Displays the operating state 16 Speaker SPK Generates an error sound 17 Hard disk HDD Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode 18 Cassette heater CH Dehumidifies the cassette section ...

Page 508: ... silk screen diagram YC31 U1 YC25 YC11 YC30 YC7 YC23 YC27 YC42 YC8 YC9 YC43 YC5 BAT1 YS1 YC1 U9 YC12 YC6 YC20 YC33 BLACK BLUE BK WH WH YC21 YC22 YC26 YS3 YS5 U2 YC10 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 7 41 10 1 200 1 20 1 3 10 1 1 5 12 1 1 6 15 6 8 7 1GB 2GB 1 5 1 5 200 STD OPT 72 1 1 50 ...

Page 509: ...ut 6 CT2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output 7 TD3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 8 TD3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 9 TD4 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 10 TD4 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 11 GRLED_A1 O 0 3 3 V DC LED emitter signal 12 GRLED_K1 O 0 3 3 V DC LED emitter signal 13 YWLED_A2 O 0 3 3 V DC LED emitter signal 14 YWLED_K2 O 0 3 3 V DC LED emitter signal 15 LockPi...

Page 510: ...tedto KUIO relay PWB 2 USB_DN1 I O USB data signal 3 USB_DP1 I O USB data signal 4 GND Ground 5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal 6 WAKEUP1 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 7 RESET1 I 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal 8 GND Ground 9 VBUS0 O 3 3 V DC 3 3V DC power output to VPWB 10 USB_DN0 I O USB data signal 11 USB_DP0 I O USB data signal 12 GND Ground 13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal 14 WAKEUP0 O 0 3 3 V DC Control s...

Page 511: ... P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 14 GND Ground 15 GND Ground 16 URAN_RSTN O 0 3 3 V DC DPRPWB control signal 17 PCIEN2_DP2 A I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 3 3V3 3 3 V DC 3 3V DC power output to DPRPWB 19 PCIEP2_DP2 A I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 20 3 3V3 3 3 V DC 3 3V DC power output to DPRPWB 21 GND Ground 22 3 3V3 3 3 V DC 3 3V DC power output to DPRPWB 23 PCIEN2_A2D P O...

Page 512: ...round 43 PCIEP0_DP2 A I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 44 GND Ground 45 GND Ground 46 PCIEN0_A2D P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 47 GND Ground 48 PCIEP0_A2D P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 49 PCIE3_SWRS T_A2DP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DPRPWB clock sijgnal 50 GND Ground YC11 1 GND Ground Connected to ISC PWB 2 SC_IRN O 0 3 3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal 3 SC_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC Scanner co...

Page 513: ... Ground 12 PANEL_RESE T O 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal 13 BEEP_POWE RON O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal 14 LED_MEMOR Y O 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 15 LED_ATTENT ION O 0 3 3 V DC Attension LED control signal 16 LED_PROCE SSING O 0 3 3 V DC Processing LED control signal 17 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal 18 INT_POWER KEY I 0 3 3 V DC Power key On Off 19 GND Ground 20 LIGHTOFF_P OWERON O 0 ...

Page 514: ...V DC Control signal 3 LOCKN I 0 3 3 V DC Lock signal 4 GND Ground 5 RX0N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 6 RX0P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 7 GND Ground YC26 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output Connected to Card reader 2 DATA I O USB data signal 3 DATA I O USB data signal 4 NC Not used 5 GND Ground YC27 1 GND Ground Connected to hard disk 2 5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output t...

Page 515: ... DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 6 GND Ground 7 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 8 GND Ground 9 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 10 GND Ground YC43 1 SLEEP_INT O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep signal Connectedto engine PWB 2 EGSCLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Engine clock signal 3 EGSI O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial comunication deta signal 4 EGSDIR O 0 3 3 V DC Engine comunication direction signal 5 EGSBS...

Page 516: ...rol signal 23 VSYNCC_N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 24 VSYNCB_P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 25 VSYNCB_N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 26 VSYNCA_P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 27 VSYNCA_N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 28 GND Ground 29 TCLKP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 30 TCLKN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 31 GND Ground 32 TCP O 0 3 3 V DC...

Page 517: ...6 YC4 YC3 YC5 YC13 YC14 YC7 YC8 YC33 YC28 YC12 YC6 YC11 YC21 YC31 YC30 YC29 1 8 1 3 1 2 15 16 1 7 1 4 1 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 11 12 2 1 1 8 1 12 1 2 20 19 50 1 1 41 1 2 7 8 1 19 20 2 B1 B15 A1 1 8 5 1 1 7 2 6 1 10 1 11 1 6 1 2 11 12 A1 B1 B17 1 16 1 14 1 14 13 2 1 3 1 7 1 4 1 17 1 3 1 4 1 2 1 5 YC10 YC24 A15 YC27 YC26 A17 YC18 YC9 YC19 YC15 ...

Page 518: ... V DC pulse Serial comunication data signal 7 G6_EG_IRN O 0 3 3 V DC Engine interrupt signal 8 JS_LED I 0 3 3 V DC LED control signal 9 ENG_OFF NC Not used 10 HLD_ENG O 0 3 3 V DC Engine hold signal 11 SLEEP_ENG O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep signal 12 HSYNC_DP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 13 HSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 14 HSYNC_CP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 15 HSY...

Page 519: ...ontrol signal 40 GND Ground YC4 1 ID1S I Analog IDS1 detection signal Connected to engine connect PWB 2 ID1P I Analog IDS1 detection signal 3 LEDREF1 O Analog IDS1 control signal 4 ID2S I Analog IDS2 detection signal 5 ID2P I Analog IDS2 detection signal 6 LEDREF2 O Analog IDS2 control signal 7 FAN_C_HALF O 0 3 3 V DC FM2 drive change signal 8 FAN_C_FULL O 0 3 3 V DC FM2 On Off 9 RESIST_SW I 0 3 3...

Page 520: ...AN_B_HALF O 0 3 3 V DC CM1 drive change signal 30 FAN_B_FULL O 0 3 3 V DC CM1 On Off 31 WTC_FULL_I N I Analog WTDS detection voltage 32 WTC_FULL_ OUT O 0 3 3 V DC WTDS On Off 33 ERASER_EN _BK O 0 3 3 V DC CL K On Off 34 DLP_TH I Analog DEVTH detection voltage 35 TCSENS_BK I Analog TS K detection voltage 36 TCSENS_M I Analog TS M detection voltage 37 TCSENS_C I Analog TS C detection voltage 38 ERAS...

Page 521: ... NT_M O Analog Developer AC bias control voltage mgenta A3 DC_MAIN_CO NT_C O Analog Chager roller control voltage cyan A4 HVU_CLK_C O DC0V 10V pulse Developer bias clock signal cyan A5 DC_SLV_C O Analog Developer sleeve roller bias control voltage cyan A6 DC_MAG_Y O Analog Developer magnet roller bias control voltage yellow A7 DC_MAG_C O Analog Developer magnet roller bias control voltage cyan A8 ...

Page 522: ...U_CLK_M O 0 10 V DC pulse Developer bias clock signal magenta B16 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to HVPWB B17 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to HVPWB YC8 1 GND Ground Connected to temperature sensor 2 TMPDATA I Analog TEMS detection voltage temperature 3 HUM_CLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TEMSClock signal 4 HUM_CLK2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TEMSClock signal 5 HUMDATA I Analog TEMS detection volta...

Page 523: ...V DC Key card control signal 8 MK2_RKEY6 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 9 MK2_RKEY5 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 10 MK2_RKEY4 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 11 MK2_RKEY3 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 12 MK2_RKEY2 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 13 MK2_RKEY1 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 14 MK2_RKEY0 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal 15 MK2_ENBL I 0 3 3 V D...

Page 524: ...an 13 SH_C O 0 3 3 V DC Sample hold signal cyan 14 BD_C I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal Synchronizing signal cyan 15 GND Ground 16 DATAY_N O LVDS Video data LVDS yellow 17 DATAY_P O LVDS Video data LVDS yellow 18 SH_Y O 0 3 3 V DC Sample hold signal yellow 19 BD_Y I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal Synchronizing signal yellow 20 GND Ground YC14 A1 3 3VIL2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to BDPWB Connect...

Page 525: ...I 0 3 3 V DC PM ready signal B11 VCONTM O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage B12 THLSUY I Analog LSU thermistor signal B13 VCONTY O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage B14 GND Ground B15 VCONTC O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage YC15 1 FAN_REM 0 3 3 V DC BRFM On Off Connected to bridge PWB 2 BRIDGE_VRE F Analog BRCM control signal 3 BRIDGE_RE M O 0 3 3 V DC BRCM On Off ...

Page 526: ...ock signal 12 DLMCREM O 0 5 V DC DRM YCM On Off 13 GND Ground 14 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DRM YCM 15 DRMKDIR O 0 5 V DC DRM K drive change signal 16 DRMKRDY I 0 3 3 V DC DRM K ready signal 17 DRMKCLK O 0 5 V DC pulse DRM K clock signal 18 DRMKREM O 0 5 V DC DRM K On Off 19 GND Ground 20 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DRM K YC17 1 DLPKDIR O 0 5 V DC DEVM K drive change sig...

Page 527: ...cted to toner motor Y C M K 2 TN_MOT_RE M_Y O 0 24 V DC TM Y On Off 3 24V1F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM C 4 TN_MOT_RE M_C O 0 24 V DC TM C On Off 5 24V1F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM M 6 TN_MOT_RE M_M O 0 24 V DC TM M On Off 7 24V1F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM K 8 TN_MOT_RE M_BK O 0 24 V DC TM K On Off YC21 1 EJE_SOL_RE M O 0 24 V DC FSSOL On Off Connected to feed sift...

Page 528: ...MPF_TRAY I 0 3 3 V DC MPTDSW On Off 7 GND Ground YC23 1 24VIL3F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FUFM1 Connected to fuser fanmotor1 and 2 2 FUSER_FAN1 _REM O 0 24 V DC FUFM1 On Off 3 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FUFM2 4 FUSER_FAN2 _REM O 0 24 V DC FUFM2 On Off YC24 1 3 3V1_A O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to DUS Connected to duplex sensor MP paper sensor eject sensor feed sensor1 2...

Page 529: ...utput to PFCL1 11 FEED1_MOT_ DIR O 0 5 V DC CM1 drive change signal 12 FEED1_MOT_ RDY I 0 3 3 V DC CM1ready signal 13 FEED1_MOT_ CLK O 0 5 V DC pulse CM1Clock signal 14 FEED1_MOT_ REM O 0 5 V DC CM1 On Off 15 GND Ground 16 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CM1 YC26 1 3 3V1_A O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to PS3 Connected to paper sensor3 4 feed sensor2 and right cover switch2 2 GND Groun...

Page 530: ...al 7 FEED2_MOT_ CLK O 0 5 V DC pulse CM2Clock signal 8 FEED2_MOT_ REM O 0 5 V DC CM2 On Off 9 GND Ground 10 24VIL3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CM2 YC29 1 24VIL2 S I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from RCSW1 Connected to right cover switch1 front cover switch 2 24VIL1 S O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to RCSW1 3 24VIL1 F I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from FCSW 4 24V1 F O 24 V DC 24 V DC power out...

Page 531: ...Relay remote 3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to IHPWB YC32 1 IH_RXD I 3 3 V DC Data input Connected to IH PWB 2 IH_TXD O 3 3 V DC Data out put 3 IH_ROT O 3 3 V DC Rotation detection 4 HEARTREM O 3 3 V DC Heater remote 5 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to IHPWB 6 GND Ground YC33 1 DF_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DFMPWBClock signalReset signal Connected to DF main PWB 2 DF_SDO O 0 3 3 V DC pu...

Page 532: ...gine connect PWB Figure 2 3 3 Engine connect PWB silk screen diagram YC1 YC9 YC7 YC5 YC12 YC4 YC6 YC16 YC15 YC12 YC13 YC11 YC10 YC3 YC8 1 4 1 4 1 2 9 10 1 3 1 3 1 6 1 8 1 5 1 12 1 50 1 6 1 8 1 5 1 4 3 2 1 2 14 15 1 2 7 8 ...

Page 533: ...FULL I 0 3 3 V DC FM2 On Off 9 RESIST_SW O 0 3 3 V DC RS On Off 10 PAPER_WSIZ E1 O 0 3 3 V DC PWSW1 On Off 11 PAPER_LSIZ E1_1 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 12 PAPER_LSIZ E1_2 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 13 PAPER_LSIZ E1_3 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 14 PAPEMP2 O 0 3 3 V DC PS2 On Off 15 PAPEMP1 O 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 16 LIFT_FULL1_ SW O 0 3 3 V DC LS1 On Off 17 LIFT_MOT1_ ALM O 0 3 3 V DC Alarm signal 18...

Page 534: ...ignal 37 TCSENS_C O Analog TS C detection signal 38 ERASER_EN _COL I 0 3 3 V DC CL YCM On Off 39 TCSENS_Y O Analog TS Y detection signal 40 BLTHP2 O 0 3 3 V DC BDS2 On Off 41 BLTHP1 O 0 3 3 V DC BDS1 On Off 42 ID_CL_HP_S W O 0 3 3 V DC IDS On Off 43 GND Ground 44 DLP_DRUM_ SDA I O 0 3 3 V DC Data signal 45 GND Ground 46 DLP_DRUM_ SCL I 0 3 3 V DC Clock signal 47 GND Ground 48 BLT_SDA I O 0 3 3 V D...

Page 535: ...3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to LS1 Connected to lift sensor1 2 GND Ground 3 LIFT_FULL1_ SW I 0 3 3 V DC LS1 On Off YC6 1 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to PS1 Connected to paper sensor1 2 and lift motor1 2 GND Ground 3 PAPEMP1 I 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 4 3 3V1_A O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to PS2 5 GND Ground 6 PAPEMP2 I 0 3 3 V DC PS2 On Off 7 LIFT_MOT1_ REMB O 0 3 3 V DC LM1 drive vo...

Page 536: ...24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CL 12 DLP_DRUM_ SCL O 0 3 3 V DC Clock signal 13 DLP_DRUM_ SDA I O 0 3 3 V DC Data signal 14 NC Not used 15 NC Not used YC9 1 DLP_FAN_RE M O 0 24 V DC IMGFM On Off Connected to image fan motor and powersouse fan motor 2 GND Ground 3 LVU_FAN_RE M O 0 24 V DC PSFM On Off 4 GND Ground YC10 1 3 3V1_A O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to IDS Connected to ID shutter...

Page 537: ...C TCBRM drive voltage output Connected to transfer connect PWB 2 BLTHP1 I 0 3 3 V DC TCBS1 On Off 3 BLT_MOT_O UTB O 0 24 V DC TCBRM drive voltage output 4 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to TCBS 5 BLT_SDA I O 0 3 3 V DC Data signal 6 BLT_SCL O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 7 BLTHP2 I 0 3 3 V DC TCBS2 On Off 8 GND Ground YC15 1 PF_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PF clock signal Connected to PF main PWB 2...

Page 538: ...Ground 12 GND Ground YC16 1 3 3V1_A O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to LS2 Connected to lift sensor1 and lift motor2 2 GND Ground 3 LIFT_FULL2_ SW I 0 3 3 V DC LS2 On Off 4 LIFT_MOT2_ OUTB O 0 24 V DC LM2 On Off 5 LIFT_MOT2_ OUTA O 0 24 V DC LM2 On Off Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 539: ...2NP 2 3 32 2 3 4 ISC PWB Figure 2 3 4 ISC PWB silk screen diagram YC5 YC14 YC2 YC1 YC13 YC9 YC6 YC11 YC7 YC12 YC8 YC3 YC4 4 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 1 40 1 11 1 6 1 1 3 1 8 7 1 1 16 6 3 5 ...

Page 540: ...ulse Transmission data signal 7 GND Ground YC5 1 SMOT AP O 0 24 V DC pulse ISUM drive control signal Connected to scanner motor 2 SMOT BP O 0 24 V DC pulse ISUM drive control signal 3 SMOT AN O 0 24 V DC pulse ISUM drive control signal 4 SMOT BN O 0 24 V DC pulse ISUM drive control signal YC6 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LEDPWB Connected to LED PWB 2 FAIL I 0 3 3 V DC Error signal 3 SDA I ...

Page 541: ...Serial communication data signal 15 AFECLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 16 GND Ground 17 DIS_CIS_1P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 DIS_CIS_1N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 19 GND Ground 20 DIS_CIS_2P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 21 DIS_CIS_2N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 22 GND Ground 23 DIS_CIS_3P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 24 DIS_CIS_3N I 0 3 3 V DC p...

Page 542: ... PWB 2 DP_TMG I 0 3 3 V DC DPTS On Off 3 DP_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC Ready signal 4 DP_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC Select signal 5 DP_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 6 DP_SO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 7 DP_SI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 8 DP_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC DPOCSW On Off 9 NC Not used 10 GND Ground 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 NC Not used 14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 ...

Page 543: ...2NP 2 3 36 YC14 1 3 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to ODSW Connected to original detection switch 2 GND Ground 3 CO_SW I 0 3 3 V DC ODSW On Off Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 544: ...2NP 2 3 37 2 3 5 IH PWB Figure 2 3 5 IH PWB silk screen diagram YC1 1 2 YC8 1 3 YC6 2 1 YC4 6 1 YC3 YC10 YC9 ...

Page 545: ...soft distinction 11 IGBT1 0 5 V DC gate output 12 IGBT2 0 5 V DC gate output 13 S2 0 5 V DC For soft distinction 14 ERROR 0 5 V DC Error signal 15 5V 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IHCONPWB 16 GND Ground YC4 1 GND Ground Connected to engine PWB 2 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to EPWB 3 IH_HEATER I 0 3 3 V DC IH On off 4 IH_ROT I 0 3 3 V DC TCBRM control signal 5 IH_TXD I 0 3 3 V DC pulse S...

Page 546: ...DC Resonance circuit output Connected to IH coil CAUTION Connectors YC1 YC3 YC6 YC9 and YC10 are not grounded therefore use caution not to damage the connectors during measurement of voltages Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 547: ...2NP 2 3 40 2 3 6 Operation panel PWB main Figure 2 3 6 Operation panel PWB main silk screen diagram YC20 1 60 YC15 YC10 1 30 YC1 1 1 2 4 YC9 YC17 1 7 YC7 1 4 B1 A10 B10 A1 1 6 YC3 ...

Page 548: ...can signal 1 16 NC Not used 17 LED0 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 0 18 LED1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 19 LED2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 2 20 NC Not used 21 KEY0 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return signal 0 22 KEY1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return signal 1 23 KEY2 I 0...

Page 549: ...C Processing LED control signal A6 LED_ATTENT ION I 0 3 3 V DC Attention LED control signal A7 LED_MEMOR Y I 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal A8 BEEP_POWE RON I 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal A9 PANEL RESET I 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal A10 GND Ground B1 P2C_SDAT O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal B2 C2P_SDAT I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal B3 P2C_SDIR O 0 3 3 ...

Page 550: ...r output to LCD 3 3 3V2 O 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output to LCD 4 CKG O 0 3 3 V DC pulse LCD clock signal 5 STVD I O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 6 GND Ground 7 GND Ground 8 VM O Analog LCD control signal 9 REV O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 10 UD O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 11 STVU I O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 12 VLS O Analog LCD control signal 13 VLS O Analog LCD control signal 14 G...

Page 551: ... V DC LCD control signal 41 RO3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 42 RO4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 43 RO5 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 44 GO0 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 45 GO1 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 46 GO2 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 47 GO3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 48 GO4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 49 GO5 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal 50 BO0 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD ...

Page 552: ...Figure 2 3 7 Power source PWB silk screen diagram YC3 TB2 TRA701 TB5 YC7 YC9 YC11 YC16 YC17 1 2 1 3 LIVE LIVE LIVE NEUTRAL LIVE YC1 1 2 3 4 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE 3 1 6 1 16 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 3 TB1 LIVE 5 6 NEUTRAL YC8 1 2 YC13 YC10 YC12 YC14 ...

Page 553: ...input from PFDSW Connected to paper feeder detection awitch 3 LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output to PFDSW YC8 1 LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output to CH Connected to cassette heater 2 LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output to PFCH 3 NC Not used 4 NC Not used 5 NEUTRAL O 100 V AC AC power output to CH 6 NEUTRAL O 100 V AC AC power output to PFCH YC11 1 24V1 Not used Connected to engine connect PWB 2 24V1 O 24 V...

Page 554: ...d 12 GND Ground 13 GND Ground 14 GND Ground 15 GND Not used 16 GND Not used YC14 1 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB Connected to main PWB 2 GND Ground 3 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB 4 GND Ground 5 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB 6 GND Ground 7 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB 8 GND Ground 9 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB 10 GND Ground YC17 1 SLEEP I 0...

Page 555: ...2NP 2 3 48 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 556: ...MP separation pad PARTS PAD SEPARATION ASSY SP 302MV94010 2MV94010 Roller Pulley ROLLERS PULLEYS Guide GUIDES Eject unit PARTS EXIT UNIT SP 302MV94540 2MV94540 Roller Pulley ROLLERS PULLEYS Guide GUIDES Contact glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS ASSY I SP 302MV94100 2MV94100 PARTS CONTACT GLASS ASSY C SP 302MV94110 2MV94110 Mirror A B C MIRROR A B C ISU lens LENS ISU Exposure unit PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 3...

Page 557: ...5 Developer unit K DV 8325K Fuser unit FK 8325 Intermediate transfer unit IMAGE UNIT MK Transfer roller unit HOLDER TRANSFER ASSY Primary feed unit PRIMARY FEED ASS Y MP separation pad PAD SEPARATION ASSY SP MP paper feed roller ROLLER MPF ASSY SP MK 8325B MAINTENANCE KIT 200 000 sheets MK 8325B MAINTENANCE KIT 1702NP0UN1 072NP0U1 Drum unit DK 8325 Developer unit C DV 8325C Developer unit M DV 832...

Page 558: ...ec tion Registration cleaner CL RE RE CL VACUUM RE Bundled MK 8325A P 1 5 11 Primary paper feed unit CL RE RE CL alcohol or dry cloth RE Bundled MK 8325A P 1 5 8 MP paper feed roller CL RE RE CL alcohol or dry cloth RE Bundled MK 8325A P 1 5 9 MP separation pad CL RE RE CL alcohol or dry cloth RE Bundled MK 8325A P 1 5 10 Rollers Pulleys CL CL CL CL alcohol or dry cloth Guides CL CL CL CL alcohol ...

Page 559: ...e appears P 1 5 28 ISU lens CL CL Airblow after dry cloth only when unusual image line appears P 1 5 25 Exposure unit CH RE RE Replace if there are image problems P 1 5 28 ISU rail LU Check abnormal noise and jitter LU scanner rail grease PG 671 P N 60170000 P 1 5 25 Original detection switch CH CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth if there is problem lighting part and light reception part ISU CH RE Replace...

Page 560: ...tion Maintenance part location Periodic maintenance x1000 counts Points and cautions Page Set up User call 200 400 Cover Covers CH CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth Inside of machine CL CL CL CL VACUUM Remove toner and paper dust especially at the paper conveying part and around the image formation part ...

Page 561: ...ing on operating conditions First occurrence of defect 50 3 mm 2 Developing roller 37 7 mm 1 1 2 Chager roller 94 2 mm 3 11 16 Drum Press roller 46 5 mm 1 13 16 Left registration roller 125 7 mm 4 15 16 Heat roller 62 0 mm 2 7 16 Right registration roller 65 7 mm 2 9 16 Transfer roller ...

Page 562: ...T Example Changing emulation mode to PC PR201 65A R FRPO P1 11 EXIT FRPO parameters Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Default pattern resolution B8 0 300 dpi 1 600 dpi 0 Copy count C0 Number of copies to print 1 999 1 Page orientation C1 0 Portrait 1 Landscape 0 Default font No C2 C3 C5 Middle two digits of power up font Last two digits of power up font First two digits of power up font 0 0...

Page 563: ...ensing For KPDL3 P4 0 AES disabled 1 AES enabled 0 KDA 1 Automatic emulation switching trigger For KPDL3 P7 0 Page eject commands 1 None 2 Page eject and prescribe EXIT 3 Prescribe EXIT 4 Formfeed L 6 Page eject prescribe EXIT and formfeed 10 Page eject commands if AES fails resolves to KPDL 10 KDA 11 Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82 R Default stacker R0 1 inner tray 3 5...

Page 564: ... 6 3 5 8 6 1 2 inches 18 ISO B5 17 6 25 cm 19 Custom 11 7 17 7 inches 30 C4 22 9 32 4 cm 31 Hagaki 10 14 8 cm 32 Ofuku hagaki 14 8 20 cm 33 Officio II 39 8K 40 16K 42 8 5 13 5 inches 50 Statement 51 Folio 52 Youkei 2 53 Youkei 4 0 Default cassette R4 0 MP tray 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 1 A4 letter equation S4 0 Off 1 On 1 Host buffer size S5 0 10kB x H8 1 100kB x H8 2 102...

Page 565: ...ulation U7 0 Same as the default emulation mode P1 1 IBM 6 IBM PC 8 50 US ASCII U6 21 SET 52 HP Roman 8 U6 77 SET 53 Font pitch for fixed pitch scalable font U8 Integer value in cpi 0 to 99 10 U9 Fraction value in 1 100 cpi 0 to 99 0 Font height for the default scal able font V0 Integer value in 100 points 0 to 9 0 V1 Integer value in points 0 to 99 12 V2 Fraction value in 1 100 points 0 25 50 75 ...

Page 566: ...gular 5 Color mode W1 0 Monochrome grayscale 1 Color CMYK 1 Gloss mode W6 0 Low normal 1 High 0 Paper type for the MP tray X0 1 Plain 1 2 Transparency 3 Preprinted 4 Label 5 Bond 6 Recycle 7 Vellum 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 12 Envelope 13 Cardstock 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 Custom1 22 Custom2 23 Custom3 24 Custom4 25 Custom5 26 Custom6 27 Custom7 28 Custom8 1 Item FRPO Setting values F...

Page 567: ...Recycled 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 17 High quality 21 Custom1 22 Custom2 23 Custom3 24 Custom4 25 Custom5 26 Custom6 27 Custom7 28 Custom8 1 PCL paper source X9 0 Performs paper selection depending on media type 1 Performs paper selection depending on paper sources 0 Automatic continue for Press GO Y0 0 Off 1 On 0 Automatic continue timer Y1 Number from 0 to 99 in increments of 5 sec ond...

Page 568: ...ds Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 8 Through the image Loads paper from the current paper cassette 9 Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 10 Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the imagesize 0 e MPS error Y6 0 Does not print the error report and display the error message 1 Prints...

Page 569: ...er power off on or it frequently occurs It may be from the hardware factor while the error Fxxx is indicated Please initially check the following Check the DDR2 memory and neighboring parts Check the contact of YS1 or YS2 with the memory Replace the memory if the error repeats Check the HDD if the error repeats after replacing the main board Take care however of handling the data when formatting o...

Page 570: ...ta FAX DIMM clear and check function Take cae of the received data since it is cleared 5 Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function 6 Replace the FAX board and check function 7 Replace the main board and check function 8 Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division Job Fax S ervice Main KUIO Interface Main board YC8 YC9 KUIO board YC3 YC4 F15X An error is detected at the authen...

Page 571: ...e the HDD and check function 5 Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division OS BMC F37X An error is detected at the FAX management section 1 Format the HDD and check function U024 FULL formatting 2 Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and check function 3 Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data FAX DIMM clear and check function Take...

Page 572: ...izing to initialize the controller backup memory and check function 3 Replace the main board and check function 4 Replace the HDD and check function 5 Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division OS BMC F64X F65X F66X F67X F68X An error is detected at the Storage device control section 1 Format the HDD and check function U024 FULL formatting 2 Execute the U021 Memory initial...

Page 573: ... Format the HDD and check function U024 FULL formatting 2 Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and check function 3 Replace the main board and check function 4 Replace the HDD and check function 5 Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division Driver Util ity KSF 2 4 18 ...

Page 574: ...tment Registration motor turning on timing secondary paper feed start timing U034 LSU OUT TOP CASSETTE U034 test pattern P 1 3 37 PAPER WIDTH 218mm or more 6 Adjusting the leading edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination start timing U402 LEAD U402 test pattern P 1 3 129 7 Adjusting the trailing edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P 1 3 ...

Page 575: ...ced on the platen To make an adjustment for rotate copying select ROTATE U071 For copying originals from the DP To make an adjustment for duplex copying select BACK HEAD Mechanism reversal model To make an adjustment for duplex copying select CIS HEAD Double sided simultaneous reading model 13 Adjusting the leading edge margin scanning adjustment Adjusting the original scan data image adjustment U...

Page 576: ...AY 10 IH_FAN2_ALM IH_FAN2_REM 24V1 3 3 3V1_A FUSER_FAN1_REM GND 4 5 Relay 1 7 6 2 7 DC_MAIN_CONT_BK DC_MAIN_CONT_M AC_MAIN_CONT_BK 5 3 1 YC24 2 4 24VIL3F1 B7 B11 B12 6 HVU_CLK_BK B13 B11 5 B15 B14 B12 B13 B14 B8 B10 GND 3 1 1 2 2 5 JEPS 3 3V4 Vcc or GND PFS Vout Vout HVU1_REM 7 2 3 DC_SLV_M GND 7 8 9 3 3V4 3 3 3V4 1 2 GND 1 2 Vout MPFWSIZE 6 DUS 2 Vout GND 3 3 3V4 2 Vout 4 B GND GND MPF_PAPER_SET ...

Page 577: ...B5 POL_RDY_Y B4 B4 B4 B5 B5 B11 B6 B6 B6 B8 B10 B7 B8 B7 B7 B9 B8 B8 3 3VIL VCONT_BK EN 5 EN C POL_RDY_C 19 20 20 B12 B12 B14 B14 19 B9 B10 B9 B10 B11 B11 17 B3 B3 B7 B7 17 18 B8 B8 18 B4 B4 POL_REM_BK B13 B13 B3 B13 B4 B12 24V1 B7 B12 B11 B9 B10 B6 B10 B11 B12 B9 LSU_CL_MOT_REMA B14 B14 B2 LSU_CL_MOT_REMB B15 B15 B1 B14 B2 GND A2 A2 A14 24V1 A1 A1 B1 B2 A15 B1 A13 A13 A15 A14 A14 A6 A1 A13 A2 A8 ...

Page 578: ... 2 9179S 5 7 6 ROM 3 4 8 9179B 5 2 3 4 9179S 1 1 6 3 9180S 9180B 3 1 5 4 6 2 8 2 ERASER_GND 4 3 8 6 5 7 SDA ERASER_REM Col GND SDA A1 A0 GND GND 3 3V4 SCL 47 YC5 8 5 3 3V2 ID_CL_MOT_OUTA ID_CL_MOT_OUTB 2 GND A1 SDA SCL NC ERASER_REM Col GND 3 3V4 GND SCL NC SDA TCSENSE Y 3 3V4 SCL 5 5 SCL A1 2 1 SDA 3 3V4 3 3V1 SCL 2 4 1 3 2 1 9180B 7 6 8 9179B ROM ROM 2 CL C CL Y ERASER_REM ERASER_GND NC ERASER_R...

Page 579: ...8 B3 B3 B10 3 B4 B4 3 DC1_COUNT_2 4 6 3 4 5 LM2 1 1 6 3 3 1 2 2 1 9 9 7 2 2 2 1 1 1 10 11 12 10 10 DC1_COUNT 11 12 11 11 4 3 TxD 12 24V4 DC1_SET 2 2 BRIDGE_DET BRIDGE_PH1 BRIDGE_PH0 1 16 15 BRIDGE_SENS1 11 9 7 6 14 13 7 9 12 BRIDGE_SENS2 BRIDGE_REM BRIDGE_CLK 8 BRIDGE_VREF 5 6 9 8 FAN_REM 8 8 11 8 3 2 YC11 1 1 2 2 16 15 14 10 13 12 4 2 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 6 SIZE_1 PAPER_LSIZE2_1 GND 2 2 1 3 4 1 2 PL...

Page 580: ...FPRM 1 Vout ES 2 GND 24V4 4 11 7 6 6 5 RXD 8 11 NEUTRAL LIVE LIVE 3 NC 4 2 LIVE NC NEUTRAL NEUTRAL 1 YC8 5 LIVE 1 250 5 TB2 TB1 LIVE 1 3 250 250 1 AC_LIVE_IN 2 1 CH 1 2 IGBT1 S1 TXD 3 2 AC_CURRENT 3 6 6 4 24V1 10 GND 11 11 7 GND 9 GND 10 GND 14 5 2 4 3 2 IH_TXD 3 IH_RXD 3 1 1 1 GND GND 3 3V1 HEARTREM 15V 2 3 1 2 2 FTS 3 1 2 1 1 IH_RELAY 2 24V1 2 3 GND 3 3V 4 YC4 4 3 3 1 3 2 GND 3 3V NEUTRAL_IN FIH...

Page 581: ...3 3V3 PCIEP1_DP2A 3 3V3 PCIEN1_DP2A 18 PCIEP2_DP2A 19 3 3V3 20 GND 3 3V3 20 14 3 SC_DIR 15 AFECLK 4 AFE_SO 14 6 6 17 PCIEN2_DP2A 4 4 16 URAN_RSTN SC_BSY SC_HLDN 4 5 5 3 16 GND 5 5 18 15 SC_SI SC_HLDN SC_SO DIS_CIS_1N 17 DIS_CIS_1P SC_BSY SC_SI 1 3 1 7 6 3 7 6 SC_IRN AFE_EN SC_DIR GND SPARE 14 PCIEP3_A2DP GND SC_CLK GND GND 12 13 SC_CLK 21 11 GND 20 DIS_CIS_2P 20 YC3 12 URAN_RSTN GND 19 8 8 2 2 13 ...

Page 582: ... DSR 13 12 12 SGND 13 VLS 12 1 5V 11 DSR 11 SGND 11 13 14 19 14 11 11 12 12 9 4 2 TD1 1 1 4 GND YC11 A2 LOCKN YC17 TX0P GND A1 TX0N GND GND LCD_OFF LIGHTOFF_POWERON GND 5 JOB_LED 6 5V0 1 2 PROCESSING_LED ATTENTION_LED MEMORY_LED 5V6 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 19 6 4 13 5V 12 VLS 5 10 10 10 PHS RXD 9 9 4 11 10 9 7 N C 6 KMTXD 7 RTS 11 5V 2 15 15 3 SGND SGND N C 9 7 8 8 8 5 SGND 7 SGND 7 7 SGND KMTXD 6 7 RXD 11 ...

Page 583: ...3V2 AC_LIVE VDD5 1 1 7 8 13 15 7 8 14 12 11 9 PF_CLK 7 1 14 RESETN0 3 RESETN 3 9 10 4 YC5 16 16 15 13 GND 8 9 9 10 4 5 7 3 2 GND 2 15 NC 17 GND 19 16 NC 20 VDD5_CUT0 4 VDD5_CUT 4 GND 5 GND 5 WAKEUP 6 AUDIO0 7 AUDIO 7 WAKEUP0 6 NC 8 NC 9 NC 9 NC 8 NC 10 GND 11 GND 11 NC 10 NC 12 NC 13 NC 13 NC 12 GND 14 NC 15 NC 15 GND 14 1 VDD5 USB_DN VBUS0 20 VBUS 20 19 VDD5 3 RESETN GND 2 2 GND RESETN1 3 5 GND V...

Page 584: ...Installation Guide DP 770 B Document processor DP 772 Document processor Installation Guide ...

Page 585: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 B DP 770 B DP 772 B B for Color MFP 25 25ppm for Black White MFP 30ppm 35ppm ...

Page 586: ...mente 2 E 1 y E 2 no se utilizan Enthaltene Teile A DP 1 B Originalmatte 1 C Befestigungshalterung Breite 38 5 mm 2 DP 770 B 1 DP 772 Deutsch C Befestigungshalterung Breite 45 mm 1 1 D Winkeleinstellbefestigung 1 E 1 DP Kabelabdeckung1 2 1 E 2 DP Kabelabdeckung2 2 1 F Stift 1 G M4 14TP Schraube 8 H Linke Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 I Rechte Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 J M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ 1 1 K Schild Fu...

Page 587: ...todas las cintas y o mate rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas O DP Kabelabdeckung B 3 1 P DP Kabelabdeckung C 3 1 3 O und P werden mit dem Gerät ausgeliefert Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden O Coperchio del cavo DP B 3 1 P Coperchio del cavo DP B 3 1 3 O e P sono forniti con la macchina Rimuovere tutti i nas...

Page 588: ...ión C con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP G ANMERKUNG Die Abbildungen des DP in der Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP 772 Vorgehensweise Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu gen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung DP 770 B 1 Die Zapfen 1 jeder Befestigungshalterung C mit den Öffnun...

Page 589: ...g DP 772 1 Die Zapfen 1 an der rechten Befestigungshalter ung C und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter ung C mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen 2 am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun gen in den MFP einsetzen 2 Die Befestigungshalterungen C C mit den 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Installieren des DP 3 Scharnierloch 3 des DP A mit Stift 4 der Befestigungshalterung C ausrichten und DP A a...

Page 590: ...ungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 60 Grad 6 Winkeleinstellbefestigung D an der Rück seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Einstellen des Öffnungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 30 Grad 7 Die obere Abdeckung 6 des DP A öffnen 8 Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben 7 und 8 Entfernen Sie den Riemen 9 der hin teren Abdeckung 10 Entfernen Sie die hin tere Abdeckung 10 des DP ...

Page 591: ...agring 11 an der Wellenkerbe 12 anbringen und Welle befestigen 12 12 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 10 wieder an Benutzen Sie die vier Schrauben 7 und 8 aus Schritt 8 Befestigen Sie den Riemen 9 der hinteren Abdeckung 10 Schließen Sie die obere Abdeckung 6 des DP A Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 770 B Beim DP 772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 8 13 Die Schraube 13 entfernen und ...

Page 592: ...tale la cubierta de cables B del DP O 14 Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung 15 durch die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B O 15 Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 16 des DP mit dem Steckverbinder 17 der ISC Platine 16 Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung B O des DP 14 Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 15 lungo la scanalatura grande sul coper chio B del cavo DP O 15 Collegare il co...

Page 593: ...er DP Kabelabdeckung B O anbringen und die DP Kabelabdeckung C P mittels der in Schritt 13 entfernten Schraube 13 befesti gen Weitergehen zu Schritt 25 auf Seite 13 Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 772 13 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 18 Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung 19 der DP Verbindung splatine zum Vorlageneinzug 14 Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben 20 Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung 21 vom Ger...

Page 594: ...tinta como se muestra en la imagen 15 Die Schraube 22 entfernen und die Abdeckung 23 des DP Kabelanschlusses abnehmen 23 wird nicht benötigt 16 Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung 24 durch die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B O Ver legen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS 25 durch die andere Nut ANMERKUNG Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden die entstehen können wenn die Signalleitung 24 des DP ...

Page 595: ...al conector 29 del MFP 17 Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 26 des DP mit dem Steckverbinder 27 der ISC Platine Installieren der DP Relaisleiterplatte 18 Den Stecker 28 an der DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit dem Stecker 29 am MFP verbinden 17 Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale DP 26 al connettore 27 della scheda ISC PWB Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazion...

Page 596: ... relé del DP M 19 Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine M Befestigen Sie es mit den beiden M3 8 Schrauben N die sich im Lieferumfang des DP 772 befinden 20 Die CIS Datenleitung 25 an den Stecker 30 auf der DP Relaisleiter platte M anschließen 19 Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB M Fissarla con le due viti M3 8 N fornite con l alimentatore DP 772 20 Inserire la linea dati CIS 25 nel connettore 30 s...

Page 597: ...O des DP 22 Die DP Kabelabdeckung C P an der DP Kabelabdeckung B O anbringen und die DP Kabelabdeckung C P mittels der in Schritt 15 entfernten Schraube 22 befestigen 23 Bringen Sie Abdeckung 21 wieder an Benutzen Sie die 2 Schrauben 20 aus Schritt 14 24 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 19 der DP Verbindungsplatine wieder an Benutzen Sie die Schraube 18 aus Schritt 13 21 Installare il coperchio del cavo ...

Page 598: ...anel de instrucciones para el original 26 Cierre el DP A y fije la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro Befestigen der Originalmatte 25 Die Originalmatte B mit dem Klettband 31 nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B die einen 90 Grad Winkel aufweist mit der linken inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten 26 Den DP A schließen und die Originalmatte B mit d...

Page 599: ...rta de la bisagra derecha I usando el tornillo M3 8 NEGRO J Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung nur DP 772 Beim DP 770 B gehen Sie zum Schritt 29 auf Seite 15 weiter 27 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H anbrin gen 28 Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung I mit der M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ J anbringen Installazione del coperchio cerniera solo DP 772 Per DP 770 B procedere con il punto 29 a pagina 15 27 Installar...

Page 600: ...eta que se encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales Figura a 31 Pegue la etiqueta de precaución La cara del original hacia arriba L del idioma que corresponde al destino del MFP sobre la eti queta en la cubierta de originales Figura b Anbringen des Schildes 29 Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Alkohol reinigen 30 Das Schild Funktionsanweisung K in der Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes ...

Page 601: ... a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia Funktionsprüfung 1 Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original a vorbereiten auf das 4 Linien b 20 mm von den Kanten des A3 Blattes und 1 Linie c in der Mitte gezeichnet sind 2 Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten 3 Das Original a auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie ers...

Page 602: ...DP 4 Das Original a mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung ANMERKUNG Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt ist die U068 DP Scan Position zu verstellen Wenn Sie die Scan Position m...

Page 603: ...ntral al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la página 26 Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 20 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinte...

Page 604: ... la línea central vea la página 33 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 29 Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 31 Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 5 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 33 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Per c...

Page 605: ...ra el copiado dúplex la separación horizontal de la línea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante 1 Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2...

Page 606: ...escala aprox 1 0 mm 4 Haga una copia de prueba 2 DP 770 B Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung C lösen DP 772 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalter ungen C C lösen 3 Die Einstellschraube 3 an der Rückseite des r...

Page 607: ...inal B y vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 13 5 Die obigen Schritte wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 0 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 0 mm liegen 6 Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 14TP Sc...

Page 608: ...te ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante 1 Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters prüfen Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die fol gende Einstellung durchzuführen Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controllo...

Page 609: ...ernen und den Riemen 6 von der hinteren Abdeckung 7 abnehmen Dann die hintere Abdeckung 7 des DP A abnehmen 4 Die Höhe des DP einstellen Lösen Sie die Mutter 8 Für Kopienmuster f Lösen Sie die Ein stellschraube 9 Für Kopienmuster g Die Einstellschraube 9 festziehen Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich Ca 0 5 mm 10 Ziehen Sie die Mutter 8 wieder fest 5 Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung 7 wie...

Page 610: ...rencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm 7 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen 8 Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm 7 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia 8 Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la lin...

Page 611: ...s Originals Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist 1 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Auto Adj wählen und die Start Taste betätigen um ein Original auszudrucken 2 Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start Taste betäti gen 3 Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start Taste betäti gen um die Oberflächeneinstellung au...

Page 612: ...ebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1 F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set zen 2 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Faceup Chart2 Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Oberfläche neinstellung ausführen zu lassen 3 Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird ist...

Page 613: ...cio 4 Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingeführt wird nur DP 772 5 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP FaceDown Chart2 Normal Target Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Rückseiteneinstellung aus...

Page 614: ... cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del escáner DP 772 Überprüfen der Vergrößerung 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Hauptscanrichtung Horiz...

Page 615: ...loración principal separación horizontal de la línea 3 dentro de 1 5 3 Die Werte einstellen Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels h j Den Wert erhöhen Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels i k Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 10 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Bezugswert Subsca...

Page 616: ... Timings 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm 2 Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden Front Head Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten Timing Oberfläche Front Tail Zur Ei...

Page 617: ...or de referencia Valor de referencia Separación vertical de la línea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel l Den Wert ver ringern Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel m Den Wert erhöhen Änderung pro Schritt 0 17 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den ...

Page 618: ...berprüfen der Mittellinie 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie 1 des Originals a und der Mit tellinie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Einzelkopie 2 0 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Duplexkopie 3 0 mm 2 Zum Einstellen d...

Page 619: ...tal de la línea de centro 2 para el copiado dúplex 3 0 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel n Den Wert erhöhen Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel o Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 085 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Bezu...

Page 620: ...DP 773 Document processor Installation Guide ...

Page 621: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 B DP 773 ...

Page 622: ...ones en el sistema de pulgadas F Etiqueta de precaución Original cara arriba 1 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y o mate rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas Enthaltene Teile A DP 1 B Originalmatte 1 C Winkelbegrenzung 1 D Dichtung 1 Deutsch E Schild Funktionsanweisung 1 für metrische Angaben für Angaben in Zoll F Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben 1 Stellen Sie sicher dass säm...

Page 623: ...nstall the DP 2 Insert DP A in the MFP Procédure Avant de commencer l installation s assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la fiche d alimentation de la prise murale Installer le DP 2 Insérer le DP A dans le MFP Procedimiento Antes de iniciar la instalación asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared ...

Page 624: ...e montre pour fixer le circuit 原稿マットの貼り付け 3 原稿マット B を マジックテープ 1 を上に向けてコンタクトガラス上に置く 原稿マット B は 90 になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること 4 DP A を下ろし 原稿マット B を DP A に貼り付ける Fije la alfombrilla para originales 3 Coloque la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro 1 mirando hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales B con la esquina...

Page 625: ...el DP A Installieren der Winkelbegrenzung Einstellen des Öffnungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 60 Grad 6 Installieren Sie die Winkelbegrenzung C am DP A Einstellen des Öffnungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 30 Grad 7 Die zwei Sicherungsringe 4 entfernen und die Achse 5 herausziehen 8 Setzen Sie die Achse 5 in die Löcher 6 ein die mit 3 markiert sind und bringen Sie die beiden Klemmringe 4 an 9 In...

Page 626: ...etiqueta que se encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales Figura a b 12 Pegue la etiqueta de precaución La cara del original hacia arriba E del idioma que corresponde al destino del MFP sobre la eti queta en la cubierta de originales Figura c Anbringen des Schildes 10 Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Alkohol reinigen 11 Das Schild Funktionsanweisung D 1 D 2 in der Sprache des jeweiligen E...

Page 627: ...inal a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia Funktionsprüfung 1 Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original a vorbereiten auf das 4 Linien b 20 mm von den Kanten des A3 Blattes und 1 Linie c in der Mitte gezeichnet sind 2 Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten 3 Das Original a auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie...

Page 628: ...el DP 4 Das Original a mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung ANMERKUNG Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt ist die U068 DP Scan Position zu verstellen Wenn Sie die Scan Positio...

Page 629: ...ntral al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la página 17 Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 10 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinte...

Page 630: ...la línea central vea la página 23 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 19 Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 21 Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 5 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 23 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Per co...

Page 631: ...ara el copiado dúplex la separación horizontal de la línea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante 1 Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie ...

Page 632: ...io de escala Aprox 1 0 mm 8 5 Haga una copia de prueba 2 Öffnen Sie die Abdeckung des DP 4 3 Entfernen Sie die innere Abdeckung 5 4 Heben Sie den Hebel 6 an Bei Verwendung der Kopiervorlage d Drehen Sie das Rad 7 in Pfeilrichtung d Bei Verwendung der Kopiervorlage e Drehen Sie das Rad 7 in Pfeilrichtung e Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich Ca 1 0 mm 8 5 Eine Testkopie erstellen 2 Aprire il coperchio...

Page 633: ... vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 2 y 3 en la página 3 6 Die obigen Schritte wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 0 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 0 mm liegen 7 Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Ab...

Page 634: ...nte ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante 1 Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters prüfen Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die fol gende Einstellung durchzuführen Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controll...

Page 635: ... DP A 4 Suelte los 3 enganches 10 de la cubierta posterior 2 Lösen Sie den Haken der Winkelbegrenzung C mit einem flachen Schraubendreher 9 Entfernen Sie die Winkelbegrenzung C 3 Öffnen Sie DP A 4 Lösen Sie die 3 Haken 10 der hinteren Abdeckung 2 Rilasciare il gancio nell accessorio di controllo angolo C utilizzando un cacciavite a testa piatta 9 Rimuovere l accessorio di controllo angolo C 3 Apri...

Page 636: ...re 12 rimosso nel passo 6 9 Rimuovere il coprioriginale B e reinserirlo vedere i passi 2 e 3 a pagina 3 5 後カバーのフック 11 2 箇所を外す 6 後カバー 12 を取り外す 7 DP の高さを調整する ナット 13 をゆるめる コピーサンプル f の場合 調整ビス 14 をゆるめる コピーサンプル g の場合 調整ビス 14 を締める 5 取下后盖板的 2 个卡扣 11 6 取下后盖板 12 每 1 格的移动量 约 0 5mm 15 将螺母 13 按原样紧固好 8 重新安装在步骤 6 中拆下的后盖板 12 9 拆下原稿垫 B 参照第 3 页的步骤 2 和 3 再次装上 5 후면 커버의 후크 11 2 개를 풉니다 6 후면 커버 12 를 제거합니다 1 개 변화량 약 0 5m...

Page 637: ...erencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm 10 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen 11 Die Schritte 1 bis 9 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm 10 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia 11 Ripetere i passi da 1 a 9 fino a che l...

Page 638: ...io Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan den ist 1 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Auto Adj wählen und die Start Taste betätigen um ein Original auszudrucken 2 Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start Taste betätigen 3 Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start Taste betä...

Page 639: ...Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1 F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set zen 2 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Faceup Chart2 Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Oberfläche neinstellung ausführen zu lassen 3 Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird is...

Page 640: ...ub Scan B ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor ación secundaria del escáner reverso Überprüfen der Vergrößerung 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Haupts...

Page 641: ...e exploración principal separación horizontal de la línea 3 dentro de 1 5 3 Die Werte einstellen Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels h j Den Wert erhöhen Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels i k Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 10 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Bezugswert S...

Page 642: ...rior reverso Überprüfen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm 2 Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden Front Head Zur Einstellung des Vorderka...

Page 643: ...l valor de referencia Valor de referencia Separación vertical de la línea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel l Den Wert ver ringern Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel m Den Wert erhöhen Änderung pro Schritt 0 17 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels...

Page 644: ...ínea central reverso Überprüfen der Mittellinie 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie 1 des Originals a und der Mit tellinie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Einzelkopie 2 0 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Duplexkopie 3 0...

Page 645: ...ontal de la línea de centro 2 para el copiado dúplex 3 0 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel n Den Wert erhöhen Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel o Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 085 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Be...

Page 646: ...PF 791 500 x 2 Paper feeder Installation Guide ...

Page 647: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 PF 791 ...

Page 648: ...r de las partes suministradas Enthaltene Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D S Tite Schrauben M3 12 2 Deutsch E Anschlag R 1 F Anschlag L 1 G S Tite Schraube M4 20 4 H Papierformatkarte 2 Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden Parti fornite A Unità di alimentazione della carta 1 B Perno 2 C Fermo 1 D Vite S Tit...

Page 649: ... con los orificios de la base de la máquina 2 Quite la bandeja de papel inferior 3 de la máquina Vorgehensweise Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu gen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist 1 Setzen Sie das Gerät 2 so auf den Papiereinzug A dass die Stifte 1 hinten links und hinten rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öffnu...

Page 650: ... piso y a continuación asegure el depósito de papel 3 Sichern Sie das Gerät 2 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A 4 Setzen Sie die untere Papierkassette 3 ins Gerät ein 5 Die Halterung C an der dargestellten Stelle mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M3 12 D bef estigen 6 Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke 4 drehen bis sie den Boden berühren und dann den Papiereinzug sichern 3 Fissare la macchina 2 sull alimen...

Page 651: ...la placa de tamaño de papel H en la ranura de visualización de tamaño 7 Wählen Sie die Öffnungen 5 und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag E F mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M4 20 G so an dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte H in den Schlitz der Formatanzeige ein 7 Selezionare i fori 5 ed installare ogni fermo E F con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 G...

Page 652: ... Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkantenabstands beträgt 20 2 5 mm an Position 1 des Beispieldokuments a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen b 20mm Den Einstellwert erhöhen b...

Page 653: ...ción Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert der Mittellinie 2 beträgt 2 0 mm oder weniger an Position 3 des Beispieldokuments c Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen d 0mm Den Einstellwert erhöhen d 0mm Den Einstellwert verring...

Page 654: ...PF 810 3000 sheets deck Installation Guide ...

Page 655: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 PF 810 ...

Page 656: ... de las partes suministradas Enthaltene Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D S Tite Schrauben M3 12 2 Deutsch E Anschlag R 1 F Anschlag L 1 G S Tite Schraube M4 20 4 H Papierformatkarte 2 Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden Parti fornite A Unità di alimentazione della carta 1 B Perno 2 C Fermo 1 D Vite S Tite...

Page 657: ...de papel A está en posición horizontal 2 Quite la bandeja de papel inferior 4 de la máquina Vorgehensweise Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu gen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist 1 Setzen Sie das Gerät 2 so auf den Papiere inzug A dass die Stifte 1 hinten links und hinten rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öff nunge...

Page 658: ...rta derecha del depós 6 ito de papel 3 Sichern Sie das Gerät 2 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A 4 Setzen Sie die untere Papierkassette 4 ins Gerät ein 5 Die Halterung C an der dargestellten Stelle mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M3 12 D bef estigen 6 Öffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 5 des Geräts 7 Die rechte Abdeckung 6 des Papiereinzugs öffnen 3 Fissare la macchina 2 sull alimentatore carta...

Page 659: ...en Riemen 7 von der Welle 8 abnehmen und dann die untere rechte Abdeckung 5 abnehmen 9 Heben Sie die Führung 3 an bis diese in der korrekten Position einrastet 10 Schließen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 6 des Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 5 wieder im Gerät ein 11 Schließen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 5 des Geräts 12 Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke 9 drehen bis sie den Boden ...

Page 660: ...ten a tierra en el suelo 13 Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette 10 und die linke Kassette 11 aus dem Papiereinzug A heraus Entfernen Sie die Verriegelung des Papier lifts 12 aus jeder Kassette und setzen Sie die Verriegelung in die Parkposition ein 14 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen 15 Wählen Sie die Öffnungen 13 und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag E F mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M4 20 G so an dass die An...

Page 661: ...frontal de la plataforma 15 Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte H in den Schlitz der Formatanzeige ein Ändern des Papierformats nur metrische Spezifikationen Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zoll maß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit metrischem Maß das Format A4 Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge schaltet werden 1 Ziehen Sie die Papierlad...

Page 662: ... gancho 19 y quite el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma 20 3 Den vorderen Konsole Cursor 15 so verschieben dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben 17 und unten 16 an der Kassette fluchtet 4 Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel 14 zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen 5 Den hinteren Konsole Cursor 18 auf gleiche Weise verschieben 6 Den Haken 19 lösen und den Hinterkante Cursor 20 der Konsole abnehmen 3 Spost...

Page 663: ...vocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel 7 Den Unter Cursor 21 anheben 8 Auf die Formatanzeige 22 ausrichten den Haken 23 einsetzen und den Hinterkante Cursor 20 der Konsole anbringen Einstellen der Cursor Breite 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 15 und dem Papier 24 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt wenn das Papier ...

Page 664: ...e entre 0 5 y 1 5 mm 3 Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen 25 im vorderen Konsole Cursor 15 stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben 26 lösen Danach den vorderen Konsole Cursor 15 verschieben 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 26 wieder anzie hen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 15 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt 3 Inserire un c...

Page 665: ...e Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkantenabstands beträgt 20 2 5 mm an Position 1 des Beispieldokuments a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen b 20mm Den Einstellwert erhöhen ...

Page 666: ...ación Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert der Mittellinie 2 beträgt 2 0 mm oder weniger an Position 3 des Beispieldokuments c Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen d 0mm Den Einstellwert erhöhen d 0mm Den Einstellwert verrin...

Page 667: ...DF 770 D Document finisher Installation Guide ...

Page 668: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 DF 770 D for Color MFP 25 25ppm for Black White MFP 30ppm 35ppm ...

Page 669: ...rial amortiguador de las partes suministra das Enthaltene Teile A Finisher 1 B Auswerffach 1 C Untere Grundplatte 1 D Verbindungsplatte 1 Deutsch E Stecker Abdeckung 1 F Ausgabeführung 1 G Heftklammer Magazin 1 H M4 8 Schraube 1 I M4 20 Schraube 2 AA Grundplatte 1 C und F werden nicht benötigt Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfern...

Page 670: ...erte los 2 enganches 1 de la parte posterior de la bandeja en los orificios 2 de la placa de elevación del finalizador ANMERKUNG Das Attachment Kit AK 740 muss installiert werden bevor der Finisher installiert wird Vorgehensweise Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu gen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist 1 Setzen Sie ...

Page 671: ... Höhe des Finishers justieren 2 Lösen Sie die 6 Haken 4 an der unteren Abdeckung 3 Entfernen Sie die vordere und hintere untere Abdeckung 3 3 Entfernen Sie die hinteren und vorderen Schrauben 5 4 Ziehen Sie die vorderen und hinteren Positionierungsstifte 6 heraus 5 Ziehen Sie die vorderen und hinteren Griffe 7 gleichzeitig hoch Bringen Sie den oberen Teil 9 des Finishers auf die niedrigste Positio...

Page 672: ...ren Sie die Höhe des oberen Teils 9 des Finishers an den Markierungen 10 die je nach Gerätetyp variieren können Bewegen Sie ihn so lange bis er in der rich tigen Position einrastet Markierung M für Farb Geräte mit Druckgeschwindigkeit von 25 25 Seiten Minute Markierung L für schwarz weiß Geräte mit Druckgeschwindigkeit von 30 und 35 Seiten Minute Markierung H nicht verwendet Installation mit schwa...

Page 673: ...lation mit Farb Geräten mit Druckge schwindigkeit von 25 25 Seiten Minute 8 Schieben Sie die vorderen und hinteren Positionierungsstifte 6 ganz ein die Sie in Schritt 4 entfernt haben Die vorderen und hinteren Positionier ungsstifte 6 müssen sichtbar sein 9 Bringen Sie den oberen Teil 9 des Finish ers am unteren Rahmen 10 an Benutzen Sie die Schrauben 5 aus Schritt 3 10 Bringen Sie die vorderen un...

Page 674: ... a terra AA viene fornita con AK 740 PF 810 が装着されている場合 11 アース板 AA をドキュメントフィニッシャー下部センターにビス M4 8 H で取り付ける PF 810 の刻印のある位置で固定する アース板 AA は AK 740 の同梱品 手順 12 に進む PF 791 が装着されている場合は次に記載しています PF 791 が装着されている場合 11 アース板 AA をドキュメントフィニッシャー下部センターにビス M4 8 H で取り付ける PF 791 の刻印のある位置で固定する アース板 AA は AK 740 の同梱品 Si le PF 810 est installé 11 Installez la plaque de terre AA en bas au centre du finisseur de docu ment à...

Page 675: ... 13 Fije la placa de conexión D a la máquina mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 I Conéctelas en el punto que se muestra arriba Solo si está instalado PF 810 ejecute el paso 14 14 Quite la cubierta divisoria 12 de la cubierta izquierda Si está instalado PF 791 vaya al paso 15 13 Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte D mit 2 M4 20 Schrauben I am Gerät an Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung gezeigten Stell...

Page 676: ...E 17 Togliere la vite 17 Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore 18 15 信号線のコネクター 13 を機械本体のコネ クター 14 に接続する 信号線 15 は フック 16 に掛けること 16 コネクターカバー E を連結板 D にはめ 込む 電線を挟み込まない様注意すること 図の位置で取り付けること 信号線のコネ クターがコネクターカバー E で隠れてい ることを確認する 17 ビス 17 を外す 後カバー 18 を取り外 す 15 Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 13 sur le connecteur 14 de la machine Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal 15 sur le crochet 16 16 Placer le ...

Page 677: ...ante 18 Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 18 in zwei Abdeckungen 18 1 18 2 auf Die Abdeckung 18 2 wird nicht benötigt 19 Installieren Sie die Abdeckung 18 1 mit der in Schritt 17 entfernten Schrauben 17 20 Öffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung des Fin ishers 19 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 20 Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung 21 nach vorne 18 Separare il coperchio posteriore 18 in due coperchi 18 1 18 2 Il cope...

Page 678: ...ón de grapado en la página 15 21 Setzen Sie den Stift 22 der Verbindung splatte D in die Öffnung 23 des Finishers Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gerät Falls die Höhe des Finishers nicht mit der auf Seite 11 in der Referenz bes chriebenen Höhe übereinstimmt justieren Sie die Höhe 22 Schieben Sie die Verriegelung 21 wieder langsam ins Gerät so dass die Verbindun gen am anderen Ende des Geräts ge...

Page 679: ... las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la altura Einstellen der Höhe 1 Überprüfen Sie dass die jeweilige Göhe der Stifte 22 der am Gerät installierten Verbind ungsplatte und Verbindungsöffnungen 23 des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen Werten übereinstimmen Korrekt Der Durchmesser a des Stifts 22 befindet sich im Höhenbereich b des Kurven...

Page 680: ...rontal y derecho posterior del finaliza dor de documentos 2 Entfernen Sie sämtliche Schrauben 25 und nehmen Sie die Vorderfußabdeckung 26 und die Hinterfußabdeckung 27 3 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 28 um den Schlüssel 29 abzunehmen 4 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 30 vorne rechts und hinten rechts am Finisher 2 Rimuovere ciascuna delle viti 25 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del piede anteriore 26 e la ...

Page 681: ... máquina 32 33 no son iguales utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la separación 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben 31 mit dem Schlüssel 29 um die Höhe des Finishers einzustellen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 6 Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben 30 wieder an und verstauen Sie den S...

Page 682: ...car la cubierta de la pata frontal 26 y la cubierta de la pata posterior 27 8 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 34 vorne links und hinten links am Finisher 9 Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben 35 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein um die Höhe des Finishers zu korrigieren Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn ...

Page 683: ...ustar la posición Valor de referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del papel Justage der Heftposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Gauptschalter ein 2 Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus doppelt geheftet 3 Prüfen Sie ob die Heftposition außermittig ist Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen Bez...

Page 684: ...referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del pape 4 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Staple HP 5 Die Werte einstellen Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts a abgesta pelt wird Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts b abgestapelt wird Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert 6 Eine Testkopie erstellen 7 Wiederholen Sie die Sch...

Page 685: ...AK 740 Bridge unit Installation Guide ...

Page 686: ...or MFP 25 25ppm Black White MFP 30ppm 35ppm Color MFP 25 25ppm Black White MFP 30ppm 35ppm A AA B C D D C C 3 1 5 2013 6 303PD56710 01 4 6 2 AK 740 ATTACHMENT KIT for Black White MFP 30ppm 35ppm Color MFP 25 25ppm ...

Page 687: ...PH 7A C D Punch unit Installation Guide ...

Page 688: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 PH 7A PH 7B PH 7C PH 7D ...

Page 689: ...lieferte Teile A Locherführung 1 B Lochereinheit 1 C Motoreinheit 1 D Anschlagring 1 Deutsch E Feder 1 F Locher PWB 1 G Lochungsabfallbehälter 1 H M3 8 Passstift Verbundschrauben 3 I Aufkleberbogen 1 J Film 1 K Kleine Klemme für DF 770 1 L Große Klemme für DF 790 1 M Ferritkern 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Guid...

Page 690: ...ite la cubierta trasera superior 4 Verfahren Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit beginnen stellen Sie sicher dass der Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Bringen Sie den Dokument Finisher zuerst und dann erst die Lochereinheit an Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3 1 Die Schraub...

Page 691: ...de la guía 10 hacia fuera Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 790 1 Die Schraube 5 entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung 6 abnehmen 2 Die 3 Schrauben 7 entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 abnehmen Anbringen der Lochereinheit 3 Die Schraube 9 entfernen und die Führung 10 nach außen ziehen Rimozione del coperchio DF 790 1 Rimuovere la vite 5 e quindi rimuovere il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 2 ...

Page 692: ... la parte ombreggiata 38 del motore illustrata per l adesione della pellicola J far aderire la pellicola 4 モーター斜線部 38 の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後 フィルム J を貼り付ける 4 Après avoir utilisé de l alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée 38 sur laquelle le film J est apposé coller ce film 4 用酒精清洁电机斜侧处 38 的粘贴位置后 粘贴胶片 J 4 모터 사선부 38 의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 필름 J 을 부착합니다 4 Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la part...

Page 693: ...del finalizador de documentos 12 6 Inserte la perforadora B en el finalizador de documentos 5 Die Locherführung A so einsetzen dass die Vorderkante der Führung 11 unter dem Rahmen 12 des Dokument Finishers liegt 6 Die Lochereinheit B in den Dokument Fin isher einsetzen 5 Installare la guida perforazione A in modo che il bordo principale della guida 11 sia sotto il telaio 12 della finitrice di docu...

Page 694: ...unidad motriz C con los 2 tornil los H 7 Die Lochereinheit B leicht anheben und den Haken 13 an der Motoreinheit C in die Nut 14 des Dokument Finishers einsetzen Dabei auch die Stange 15 an der Motoreinheit C in die Öffnung 16 der Lochereinheit B einstecken 8 Die Motoreinheit C mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 7 Sollevare leggermente l unità di perforazione B ed inserire il gancio 13 sull unità motor...

Page 695: ...la unidad motriz 19 9 Den Anschlagring D auf die Stange 15 der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder E zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit einsetzen 10 Das Kabel 17 der Lochereinheit durch den Kantenschutz 18 der Motoreinheit führen 11 Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit 19 anschließen 9 Inserire l anello di bloccaggio D sull asta 15 dell unità motore ed in...

Page 696: ...tallation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12 12 Die 2 Haken 20 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 21 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 23 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 22 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 24 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F fe...

Page 697: ...ora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 27 der DF Haupt PWB 26 anschließen 16 Die kleine Klemme K am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 27 sulla ...

Page 698: ...a cubierta delantera superior 28 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 4 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 2 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 4 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 2 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 28 ed inserire lo ...

Page 699: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración B C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 28 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen B C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 700: ...oración F Installation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 790 12 Die 2 Haken 29 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 30 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 32 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 31 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 33 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F festziehen 14 Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck...

Page 701: ...adora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 36 der DF Haupt PWB 35 anschließen 16 Die große Klemme L am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 36 sulla...

Page 702: ...a cubierta delantera superior 37 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 6 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 8 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 37 ed inserire lo ...

Page 703: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración A C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 37 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen A C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 704: ...ón Einstellen der Lochungsposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen 3 Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte ist die Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist 2 Die W...

Page 705: ...ón Valor de referencia c Sistema métrico 13 mm en pulgadas 9 5 mm Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt Den Einstellwert erhöhen Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt...

Page 706: ...tanzlochposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Width 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert verringern Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert erhöhen 3 Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start Taste bestätigen Bezugswert Metrischer Abstand d 80 mm 0 5 e 40 mm 2 Abstand in Z...

Page 707: ...s instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 770 DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 770 DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 708: ...DT 730 B Document tray Installation Guide ...

Page 709: ... ࡋࡲࡏࢇࠋ ࡣࠊ ᮏవࡾࡲࡍࠋ INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE ᆿ㻻ᢁ߂ タ ᡭ㡰 I J e K non vengono utilizzati н DŽ Պ њDŽ 1 piece of D will be left Une pièce de D sera laissée inutilisée Una parte de D debe dejarse 1 Stück von D bleibt übrig Rimarrà 1 pezzo di D for Color MFP 25 25ppm OpPSOqPGⵃGOrPᴴG 㟝 㫴G㙾 U OkPG䙰 G䚌 ᴴG G U for Black White MFP 30...

Page 710: ...5 2013 5 302LC56750 01 H F G D D 6 4 3 7 E C D D M4 8 M4 8 M4 8 M4 8 ...

Page 711: ...FAX System W B Installation Guide ...

Page 712: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE GUIDE D INSTALLATION GUÍA DE INSTALACION INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE 安装手册 설치안내서 設置手順書 FAX System W ...

Page 713: ...n des FAX Systems in einem Gerät B das über die Taste Zugriffsanzeige im Bedienfeld verfügt siehe Seite 22 bis 34 Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gerät B das über die Taste Zugriffsanzeige im Bedienfeld verfügt siehe Seite 35 bis 41 Deutsch El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad En las siguientes páginas se describe cada procedimiento Al inst...

Page 714: ...Speicher DIMM 128 MB 1 B F und G liegen nicht bei Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden Parti fornite A Scheda a circuiti FAX 1 C Guarnizione terminale 1 D Etichetta alfabetica 1 E Memoria DIMM 16 MB 1 Opzioni H Memoria DIMM 128 MB 1 B F e G non sono in dotazione Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o i materiali di protezio...

Page 715: ...e pared ANMERKUNG Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommaschinen Die Abbildungen der allgemeinen Prozed...

Page 716: ...lation der DIMM Speichermodule 1 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab 2 Setzen Sie den DIMM Speicher E oder den optionalen DIMM Speicher H in der Speicher steckplatz 3 Installieren Sie die Platine mit den Speicherbausteinen nach oben Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis es hörbar einrastet 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit den 2 Schrauben 1 an Procedura ...

Page 717: ... 2 tornillos 6 y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT1 5 No utilice OPT2 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 4 Die Abdeckung 4 entfernen Bei schnellen MFPs mit ohne Finisher oder mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Fin isher 5 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschubs OPT1 ent fernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Rimozione del coperchio vano 4 Rimuovere il coperchio 4 Per dispos...

Page 718: ...e la etiqueta 7 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 6 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 5 ausgebauten Schrauben 6 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein ...

Page 719: ...100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 7 Telefonmodulkabel 8 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefon dose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del tele fono 7 Inserire il cavo connettore m...

Page 720: ...odelos de 120 V asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 10 Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon 8 Das Telefonmodulkabel 9 in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa rate Telefon anschließen Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange schlossen wird die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen falls vom Ku...

Page 721: ...bierta 4 que se quitó en el paso 4 Para los MFP de velocidad alta con sin finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad media con el finalizador instalado Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse für Neuseeland Modell 9 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 10 Die Abdeckungen 11 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen 11...

Page 722: ...rda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 13 14 para quitarlas 14 Quite el panel transparente 15 Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber ausgenommen 100 V Modelle 13 Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen 12 bezeichneten Spitze einschieben und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 verschieben um sie dann abzunehmen 14 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 entfernen Applicare le etichette alfabetich...

Page 723: ... Oceanía utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las OPER 15 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 entfernen 16 Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie 16 mit Alkohol abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber D hier anbringen In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden 15 Rimuovere il foglio 16 del pannello opera...

Page 724: ... el panel transparente 15 19 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 13 14 17 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 anbringen 18 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 wieder anbrin gen 19 Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 wie der anbringen 17 Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 16 18 Reinstallare il pannello trasparente 15 19 Reinstallare i coperchi 13 14 del pannello operativo 17 この作業は不要 18 この作業は不要 19 こ...

Page 725: ... de aprobación sólo para los modelos Austra liano Nuevo Zelandés 21 Este paso no es necesario Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen für China nur 110 V Mod elle 20 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen nur für Australien Neusee land Modell 21 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich Applicare l etichetta di approvazione per Cina solo per i modelli da 110 V 20 Questo ...

Page 726: ...te el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB Initialisieren der FAX Leiterplatte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus um die FAX Karte zu ini tialisieren Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX 1 Collegare l MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l interruttore princi pale su On 2 Eseguire il modo manu...

Page 727: ... Zealand models only 2 Option H Memory DIMM 128 MB 1 D E F G and H are not used Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning materials from the parts supplied 同梱品 A FAX 基板 1 B モジュラーコード 1 C 端子シール 1 E メモリーDIMM 16MB 1 オプション H メモリーDIMM 128MB 1 D F G は 同梱されていない E H は 使用しない 同梱品に固定テープ 緩衝材が付いている場合 は必ず取り外すこと 동봉품 A FAX 기판 1 C 단자씰 1 D 알파벳 라벨 1 E 메모리 DIMM 16MB 1 옵션 H 메로리 DIMM 128MB 1 B F G 는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 D E ...

Page 728: ... bevor Sie das FAX System W installieren Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist AVISO Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las máquinas a color de 30 30 35 35 45 45 y 55 50 ppm y a las máquinas monocromáticas de 35 45 y 55 ppm Las referencias...

Page 729: ...x OPT1 2 Quite 2 tornillos 6 y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT2 5 Vorgehensweise Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 1 Die Abdeckung 4 entfernen Bei schnellen MFPs mit ohne Finisher oder mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Finisher Dies ist nicht nötig wenn eine zweite Leitung zusammen mit dem FAX System OPT1 installiert ist 2 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschu...

Page 730: ...iqueta 7 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 3 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 2 ausgebauten Schrauben 6 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetz...

Page 731: ...V asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 10 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse 4 Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe C anbringen Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar ungül tig Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons zu verhindern Bei ...

Page 732: ...delos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 5 Telefonmodulkabel 17 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 5 Inserire il cavo conn...

Page 733: ... Para los MFP de velocidad alta con sin finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad media con el finalizador instalado Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6 Die Abdeckungen 11 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen Führen Sie es zusammen mit dem Kabel des FAX Systems OPT1 7 Die Abdeckungen 11 wieder anbringen 8 Installieren Sie die Abdeckung 4...

Page 734: ...tte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Falls die FAX Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden alle FAX Karten werden initialisiert führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus um die FAX Karten zu initialisieren 3 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist um die FAX Leit erplatte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren OPT2 initialisieren Dazu...

Page 735: ...iegen nicht bei Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden Parti fornite A Scheda a circuiti FAX 1 C Guarnizione terminale 1 D Etichetta alfabetica 1 E Memoria DIMM 16 MB 1 Opzioni H Memoria DIMM 128 MB 1 B F e G non sono in dotazione Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite 同梱品 A FAX 基...

Page 736: ...o de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared ANMERKUNG Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist müssen Sie ihn ausbauen bevor Sie das FAX System W installieren Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist AVVISO Se la finitrice è già installata rimuovere la f...

Page 737: ...nstallation der DIMM Speichermodule 1 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab 2 Setzen Sie das DIMM Speichermodul E oder das optionale DIMM Speichermodul H in die untere Position FLS der Speicherbank 3 ein Mit der IC Seite nach unten weisend install ieren Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis es hörbar einrastet 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit den 2 Schrau...

Page 738: ...ite la cubierta de la ranura OPT1 4 No utilice OPT2 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 4 2 Schrauben 5 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 4 des Einschubs OPT1 entfernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Rimozione del coperchio vano 4 Rimuovere le 2 viti 5 e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio 4 del vano OPT1 Non utilizzare OPT2 スロットカバーの取り外し 4 ビス 5 2 本を外し OPT1 のスロットカバー 4 を取り外す OPT2 は使用しないこと 拆下插槽盖板 4 拆除 2 颗螺丝 5 拆下 OPT1 的...

Page 739: ...nte la etiqueta 6 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 5 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 4 ausgebauten Schrauben 5 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bei...

Page 740: ...e 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 6 Telefonmodulkabel 7 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 6 Inserire il cavo connettore m...

Page 741: ...s de 120 V asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 9 Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon 7 Das Telefonmodulkabel 8 in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa rate Telefon anschließen Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange schlossen wird die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen falls vom Kunden g...

Page 742: ...a borne modèle pour la Nouvelle Zélande 8 Cette étape est superflue Selle el terminal para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés 8 Este paso no es necesario Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse für Neuseeland Modell 8 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich 端子シールの貼り付け ニュージーランド仕様のみ 8 この作業は不要 단자씰의 부착 뉴질랜드 사양만 8 이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 安装端子密封 仅适用于新西兰型号 8 不需要本步骤 Sigillare il terminale per il modello Nuova Zelanda 8 Questo passo n...

Page 743: ...estra a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 11 12 para quitarlas 10 Quite el panel transparente 13 Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber ausgenommen 100 V Modelle 9 Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen 10 bezeichneten Spitze einschieben und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 11 12 verschieben um sie dann abzunehmen 10 Die durchsichtige Platte 13 entfernen Applicare le etic...

Page 744: ... Asia y Oceanía utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las OPER 11 Die Bedienfeldfolie 14 entfernen 12 Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie 14 mit Alkohol abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber D hier anbringen In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden 11 Rimuovere il foglio 14 del pannell...

Page 745: ...nstalar el panel transparente 13 15 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 11 12 13 Die Bedienfeldfolie 14 anbringen 14 Die durchsichtige Platte 13 wieder anbrin gen 15 Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 11 12 wieder anbringen 13 Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 14 14 Reinstallare il pannello trasparente 13 15 Reinstallare i coperchi 11 12 del pannello operativo 13 この作業は不要 14 この作業は不...

Page 746: ...ta de aprobación sólo para los modelos Austra liano Nuevo Zelandés 17 Este paso no es necesario Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen für China nur 110 V Mod elle 16 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen nur für Australien Neusee land Modell 17 Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich Applicare l etichetta di approvazione per Cina solo per i modelli da 110 V 16 Quest...

Page 747: ...mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB Initialisieren der FAX Leiterplatte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus um die FAX Karte zu ini tialisieren Questo passo non è richiesto Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX 1 Collegare l MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l interruttore princi pale su On 2 Esegui...

Page 748: ...i D E und H werden nicht benötigt Stellen Sie sicher dass sämtliche Klebebänder und oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden Parti fornite A Scheda a circuiti FAX 1 C Guarnizione terminale 1 D Etichetta alfabetica 1 E Memoria DIMM 16 MB 1 Opzioni H Memoria DIMM 128 MB 1 B F e G non sono in dotazione D E e H non sono utilizzati Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o i materiali...

Page 749: ...o de la máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared ANMERKUNG Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist müssen Sie ihn ausbauen bevor Sie das FAX System W installieren Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist AVVISO Se la finitrice è già installata rimuovere la f...

Page 750: ...a 1 Quite 2 tornillos 5 y después quite la cubierta de la ranura OPT2 4 Vorgehensweise Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 1 2 Schrauben 5 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 4 des Einschubs OPT2 entfernen Procedura Rimozione del coperchio vano 1 Rimuovere le 2 viti 2 e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio 1 del vano OPT2 取付手順 スロットカバーの取り外し 1 ビス 5 2 本を外し OPT2 のスロットカバー 4 を取り外す 安装步骤 拆下插槽盖板 1 拆除 2 颗螺丝 5 拆下 OPT2 的插...

Page 751: ...etiqueta 6 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 2 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt1 ausgebauten Schrauben 5 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einset...

Page 752: ...úrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 9 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse 3 Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe C anbringen Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar ungül tig Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons zu verhindern Bei 120 V M...

Page 753: ...delos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 4 Telefonmodulkabel 15 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 4 Inserire il cavo conn...

Page 754: ...tte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Falls die FAX Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden alle FAX Karten werden initialisiert führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus um die FAX Karten zu initialisieren 3 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist um die FAX Leiter platte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren OPT2 initialisieren Dazu...

Page 755: ... Takapuna Auckland New Zealand Phone 64 9 415 4517 Fax 64 9 415 4597 KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited Unit 3 5 16 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan New Territories Hong Kong Phone 852 2496 5678 Fax 852 2610 2063 KYOCERA Document Solutions China Corporation 8F No 288 Nanjing Road West Huangpu District Shanghai 200003 China Phone 86 21 5301 1777 Fax 86 21 5302 8300 KYOCERA Docu...

Page 756: ...6 Mecidiyeköy 34394 Şişli İstanbul Turkey Phone 90 212 356 7000 Fax 90 212 356 6725 is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Altmannsdorferstraße 91 Stiege 1 2 OG Top 1 1120 Wien Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Docu...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for TASKalfa 2551ci

QMS 1660 Operation preview
1660
Brand: QMS Pages: 122
QMS 1660 Reference Manual preview
1660
Brand: QMS Pages: 306
Macherey-Nagel NANOCOLOR UV/VIS II User Manual preview
NANOCOLOR UV/VIS II
Brand: Macherey-Nagel Pages: 6
Oki ML280 Elite Parts List preview
ML280 Elite
Brand: Oki Pages: 6
Oki ML1120 Safety & Warranty preview
ML1120
Brand: Oki Pages: 32
Oki ML1120 User Manual preview
ML1120
Brand: Oki Pages: 52
Oki ML520n Guía Del Usuario preview
ML520n
Brand: Oki Pages: 64
Oki ML520 Service Manual preview
ML520
Brand: Oki Pages: 269
Oki C9200 Replacement Manual preview
C9200
Brand: Oki Pages: 2
Oki C9200 Setup Manual preview
C9200
Brand: Oki Pages: 32
Oki C9200 Parts List preview
C9200
Brand: Oki Pages: 33
Oki B721dn Instructions Manual preview
B721dn
Brand: Oki Pages: 8
Oki ML690 Manual De L'Utilisateur preview
ML690
Brand: Oki Pages: 101
Oki ML690 Guía Del Usuario preview
ML690
Brand: Oki Pages: 104
Oki ML690 User Manual preview
ML690
Brand: Oki Pages: 99
Oki ML620 Manual Do Usuário preview
ML620
Brand: Oki Pages: 112
Oki ML620 User Manual preview
ML620
Brand: Oki Pages: 100
Oki Okicolor8 Specifications preview
Okicolor8
Brand: Oki Pages: 38

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands